Design of An Industrial Village

DESIGN OF WATER SUPPLY,
SANITATION AND SEWERAGE

SYSTEMS OF RONGIN TEXTILE
VILLAGE
Project Planners and Designers

Group 2
Abdullah Al Hadi (1104006)
Abhijit Das (1104032)
Sudipto Bosu (1104073)
Afsara Tasnia (1104097)
Sudipta Roy (1104114)
Sumaiya Tabassum (1104168)
Tushit Chakma (1104195)
Students of Level-4/Term-2,
Department of Civil Engineering,
Bangladesh University of Engineering & Technology.
Bangladesh University of Engineering & Technology
Department of Civil Engineering
Dhaka, Bangladesh.
Course No.: CE - 432

Course Title: Design of Water Supply, Sanitation and Sewerage
Systems
Design of Water Supply, Sanitation and

Sewerage Systems of Rongin Textile
Village
Submitted to
Dr. A.B.M. Badruzzaman
Professor
Snigdha Afsana
Assistant Professor
Submitted By
Sudipta Roy
Student ID: 1104114
Level-4, Term-2
Session: 2014-15
Abstract
The report provides design of water supply system, sewerage system of ‘Rongin
Industrial Village’ and plumbing system of a residential building. First seven
chapters cover design of water supply system. Organogram, population estimation
and water demand calculation were made as a prerequisite of all designs. Design of
Water well, pumping device, water distribution networks are included in the design
of water supply system. Chapter Eight covers the design of sewer network system
in particular design of trunk sewer. Chapter Nine includes the design of plumbing
system of a residential building. At the end, report on field visit to a Central
Effluent Treatment Plant is attached. The report encompasses the basics of
Engineering Hydraulic Design to understand the challenges in designing of water
supply system, sewerage system, plumbing system and wastewater treatment plant.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Title Page
Introduction ……………………………………………………………. 1
Chapter 1: Preparation of Organogram ………………………… 5
Objective 6
Description of Organogram 6
Organogram 8
Chapter 2: Drawing Layout …………………………………….….. 11
Objective 12
Characteristics 12
Steps 13
Chapter 3: Population Estimation …………………………………. 16
Objective 17
Principles 17
Assumptions 17
Residential zone 18
Administrative zone 18
Industrial zone 19
Common services 19
Sample Calculation 19
Summary 26
Chapter 4: Water Demand Calculation ………………………… 27
Objective 28
Classification of Water Demand 28
Residential Water Demand 28
Industrial Water Demand 29
Administrative Water Demand 30
Water Demand for Common services 31
Water Demand for firefighting 31
Positioning of Fire Hydrants 32
Summary 37
Chapter 5: Water Well Design and Report on
Pumping Station Visit …………………………………. 38
Objective 39
Scope of the Study 39
Types of Aquifer 40
Methodology
Grain size Distribution for Different soil layer 41
Location of the Aquifer and Water Bearing Strata 41
Determination of Strainer Length and Position 42
Design of Gravel Pack Material 43
Yield of Well 43
Data analysis and Calculation
Sample Calculation of Grain Size Distribution 43
Locating the Aquifer and Water Bearing Strata 55
Determination of Strainer Length and Position 56
Design of Gravel Pack Material 57
Selection of Strainer Size 58
Calculation of Yield of Well 59
Limitations of the study 60
Report on Pumping Station Visit 64
Summary 71
Chapter 6: Determination of Pump Capacity
And Pumping Schedule …………………………………. 72
Objective 73
Scope of the Study 73
Terminology used in Pumping 73
Determining Pump Capacity
Methodology 77
Steps 77
Data Analysis and Calculation 78
Determining Pumping Schedule
Methodology 81
Design of Storage Reservoir
Methodology 88
Data Analysis and Calculation 89
Chapter 7: Design of Water Supply Distribution Network …..... 90
Objective 91
Requirements of a Good Distribution System 91
Pressure in the Distribution System 91
Layouts of Distribution Network 91
Branched/ dead end System 92
Looped Network 93
Grid Iron System 93
Ring System 93
Radial System 94
Distribution System Layout Design Procedure 94
Branched Network 94
Assumptions 94
Steps in design of Branched Network 95
Chapter 8: Design of Sewer System ………………………………… 109
Objective 110
Classifications 110
Trunk Sewer 111
Components of Wastewater of Industrial Village 111
Inflow to Sanitary Sewer Systems 111
Infiltration to Sanitary Sewer Systems 111
Average Wastewater Flows 112
Peak Wastewater Flows 112
Sanitary Sewer: Basic Design Considerations 113
Hydraulic Design Equation 113
Pipe Sizes 113
Flow Velocities 113
Sewer Pipe Slopes 114
Sewer Appurtenances 115
Manhole 115
Vertical Profile 115
Steps of Sewer System Design 116
Chapter 9: Design of Plumbing System ………………………128
Objective 129
Plumbing 129
Major Elements of Plumbing System 129
Design of Water Supply and Distribution System 130
Calculation of Dimension of Underground Water Reservoir 133
Calculation of Dimension of Overhead Water Tank 133
Design of Riser Pipe and Pump 134
Calculation of Pump Capacity 134
Calculation 135
Design of Drainage System 138
Report on Field Tour in CETP 149

References 152
Appendix 156
LIST OF TABLES
Table title Page
Chapter 3: Population Estimation
Table 3.1: Population Estimation for Administrative Zone 20
Table 3.2: Population Estimation for Industrial Zone 21
Table 3.3: Population Estimation for Common Services 22
Table 3.4: Population Estimation for Residential Zone 24
Table 3.5: Summary of Population Estimation 26
Chapter 4: Water Demand Calculation
Table 4.1: Residential Water Demand Calculation 33
Table 4.2: Industrial Water Demand Calculation 34
Table 4.3: Water Demand Calculation for Common Services 35
Table 4.4: Water Demand Summary 37
Pumping Station Visit
Table 5.1: MIT Classification of soil 41
Table 5.2: Soil Classification according to Fineness Modulus Values 42
Table 5.3: Recommended Screening according to Aquifer Thickness 42
Table 5.4: Screen Opening according to Slot Size 43
Table 5.5: Grain Size Distribution Table at a Depth 280 ft 45
Table 5.15: Summary of Grain Size Distribution 55
Table 5.16: Finding the initial point on Gravel Pack Curve 57
Table 5.17: Gravel Pack Material Design 58
Table 5.18: Well Number Calculation 60
And Pumping Schedule
Table 6.1: Pumping schedule for present demand in Zone 1 82
Table 6.2: Pumping schedule for demand after 10 years in Zone 1 83
Table 6.4: Pumping schedule for present demand in Zone 2 85
Table 6.7: Design of Storage Reservoir 89
Chapter 7: Design of Water Supply Distribution Network
Table 7.1: Branched Network Design 97
Table 7.2: Determination of Inflow and Outflow at Each Nodes 100
Table 7.3: Design of Loop Network (Trial 1 and Trial 2) 105
Chapter 8: Design of Sewer System
Table 8.1: Percentages of avg. Wastewater in different categories 112
Table 8.2: Peak factors for different categories 112
Table 8.3: Gravity Sewer Minimum Pipe Slopes 114
Table 8.4: Wastewater Calculation (Excluding infiltration) 123
Table 8.5: Calculation of Infiltration 124
Table 8.6: Calculation of Pipe Diameter 125
Table 8.7: Calculation of Pipe Profile 126
Table 8.8: Manhole Positions 126
Chapter 9: Design of Plumbing System
Table 9.1: Design of down feed zone pipes 144
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure title Page
AUTOCAD DRAWINGS
Chapter 2: Drawing Layout
Figure 2.1: Layout of Rongin Industrial Village 15
Figure 4.1: Position of fire hydrants in layout 36
Figure 5.12: Bore log and well log 61
Figure 5.13: Well log details 62
Figure 5.14: Position of Pumps in Layout 63
Chapter 7: Design of Water Supply Distribution System
Figure 7.3: Branch Network 98
Figure 7.8: Loop Network 107
Figure 7.9: Water Distribution Network 108

Figure 8.5: Contour Map 120
Figure 8.6: Feeder Area 121
Figure 8.7: Trunk Sewer and Manholes in Layout Plan 122
Figure 8.8: Longitudinal Profile of Trunk Sewer 127
Chapter 9: Design of Plumbing System
Figure 9.1: Typical Floor Plan of the Building 145
Figure 9.2: Water Plumbing Network 146
Figure 9.3: Building Elevation with Water Plumbing Network 147
Figure 9.4: Drainage System of the Building 148
GRAPHS AND CHARTS PLOTTED IN EXCEL FOR DATA
ANALYSIS
Chapter 3: Population Estimation
Figure 3.1: Population percentages in residential zone 25
Figure 4.2: Comparison of Water Demand in different zones 38
Figure 5.1: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 280 ft 45
Figure 5.11: Grain Size Distribution for the Gravel Pack Material 57
EMPIRICAL GRAPHS
Figure 6.2: Pump Characteristics Curve 75
Figure 7.6: Head Loss Determination Curve (For Roughness 103
Coefficient C = 120)
Figure 7.7: Nomo graph for Hazen-William Equation (For C = 100) 104

Figure 8.1: Average infiltration rate allowance to new users 111
Figure 8.2: Peak factor for residential wastewater 112
Figure 8.3: Hydraulic Element Diagram for Circular Sewer 116
Figure 8.4: Invert and Crown level of Pipe 117
DIAGRAMS
Figure 6.1: Definition sketches for determination of pump total static head 74
Figure 6.3: Centrifugal Pump 76
Figure 6.4: Piston Pump 76
Figure 6.6: Screw Pump 76
Figure 6.8: Rotary Pump 76
Figure 6.15: Consideration of Storage Reservoir Design 88
Figure 7.1: Branched or dead-end system 92
Figure 7.2: (a) Grid-iron system, (b) Ring system 93
Figure 7.4: Inflow and Outflow at different Nodes 101
Figure 7.5: Final Flow in Every pipe 102
Figure 8.4: Invert and Crown level of Pipe 117
PHOTOGRAPHS
Figure 5.15: Ampere and Voltmeter (West Palashi Pumping Station) 65
Figure 5.16: Motor Starter and Electric Cable (W. Palashi Pumping Station) 65
Figure 5.17: 6 inch diameter Suction Pipe (West Palashi Pumping Station) 66
Figure 5.18: Water Pressure Indicator (West Palashi Pumping Station) 67
Figure 5.19: Non Return Valve (West Palashi Pumping Station) 67
Figure 5.20: Disinfection and Water Supply Lines
(West Palashi Pumping Station) 68
Figure 5.21: Suction Pipe (Nazrul Hall Pumping Station) 69
Figure 5.22: Chlorinator Cylinder (Nazrul Hall Pumping Station) 70
Figure 6.3: Centrifugal Pump 76
Figure 6.5: Diaphragm Pump 76
Figure 6.7: Airlift Pump 76
Figure 6.8: Rotary Pump 76
LIST OF ATTACHED DRAWINGS
(ENLARGED SCALE)
1. Layout of Industrial Village
2. Water Distribution Network
3. Sewer Network
4. Longitudinal Profile of Trunk Sewer
5. Plumbing System
Gantt chart of The Project
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
TASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Organogram,
Layout,
Population &
Water Demand
Calculation
Water Well
Design
Design of
Pumping
Device
Water
Distribution
Network
design
Design of
Sewer
Network
Plumbing
Design
* In the week 9, 10 & 11 work was paused due to Civil summit.

INTRODUCTION
CE - 432 Introduction
The main objectives of the course CE-432 titled ‘Design of Water supply,
Sanitation and Sewerage Systems’ are as follows:
1. Design of infrastructure for the collection, transmission, storage, and
distribution of water for residential, commercial establishments, industry
as well as for such public needs as firefighting.
2. Design of network of pipes for the collection of wastewater, or sewage
and also the treatment of this wastewater
3. Design of system of pipes and fixtures installed in a building for the
distribution and use of potable (drinkable) water and the removal of
waterborne wastes.
The name of the project of our group for this course is ‘Design of Water
supply, Sanitation and Sewerage Systems of Rongin Textile Village’. It is an
industrial village situated in Narayanganj on the bank of Shitalakhya River.
The industrial village covering an area of 100 hectares provides residential,
educational and also recreational facilities to its employees. The aim of this
project is to design water supply and sewerage system of this industrial village.
The first task of a project is the planning for the tasks to be accomplished and so
at first we prepared a Gantt chart for different activities. The aim is to finish the
design of the project within 14 weeks. The first phase of the project is the
design of water supply system and the procedures for design of water supply
system are as follows.
The structure and relationship of the different groups of people is illustrated in
an Organogram. It also reflects the demographic structure of the industrial
village. So, an organogram is prepared for the industry. The layout allocates
space for different components in the area, provided for the village. Proper
placement of different facilities can ensure a healthy environment to the
employees and their families. So a layout is drawn to provide the best possible
environment to its dwellers by utilizing the sources available to us. Parks,
Playground, canteens, mosques, banks, shops and hospitals were provided in the
industrial village. Fire station is also established to ensure fire safety. The layout
also meets the demand of future extension. Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) and
power stations are also installed in the industrial village.
Demographic data is a prerequisite for the design of water supply system. The
present population along with population projection for 10 and 20 years are
made on the available statistical data by Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics. The
water demand of the industrial village is calculated on the estimation of
2
population and production capacity of the industry. Bangladesh National

Building Code (2011) acted as guideline for the calculation of water demand.
After estimation of the water demand, the next task is the collection of water to
meet the demand. The water demand of the industrial village is completely met
by groundwater sources. Water wells were designed to provide maximum
performance with minimum cost for longest service life. The numbers of wells
required to meet the demand is also determined. Rapid depletion of ground
water level in Bangladesh is considered seriously so that it can meet the demand
up to 20 years. Well log of wells and bore log of the soil strata is attached with
this report.
The transmission of the collected water will be carried out by submersible
pump. The capacities of the pumps are calculated as it has to lift the water from
source to the overhead water tank. A pumping schedule was prepared to ensure
continuous supply of water and also to meet the demand for firefighting. To
gather practical experience about pumping schedule, pumping stations of BUET
were visited. The water demand fluctuates at different hours of the day but the
supply system must be capable to supply the maximum demand of the day. So
water demands for different hours of the day were assumed to design supply
system.
The distribution system must ensure delivery of water at appropriate quantity,
quality and pressure to the consumer. Branched and looped network system is
provided in the industrial village. AutoCAD drawing showing the location of
water wells, pumps, overhead water tank, and distribution line is added along
the report.
The second phase of the project is to design sanitation and sewerage system of
the industrial village. The first task is to estimate the quantity of the wastewater
generation. The quantity of the wastewater is estimated from amount of water
supplied and amount of infiltration. The storm water is not included in
calculation of waste water. For the design of the sewer system the gravity flow
is considered to reduce the cost. Only the design of the trunk sewer is added to
this report as a sample of the design of sewer. Appurtenances of sanitary sewer
system like manholes also considered in the design of the sewer system. A
longitudinal profile of the trunk sewer is also illustrated in the report.
The third phase of the project is to design household plumbing system. The
plumbing system of a residential building has been included in this report. At
first plumbing system is designed for distribution and use of potable (drinkable)
water. Major elements under this category includes riser, up feed or down feed
3
distribution pipes, overhead and underground water tanks, plumbing fixtures

and traps. Then plumbing system for the removal of waterborne wastes is
designed. The design includes soil, waste and vent pipes, building drains –
sewers with their respective connections, devices and appurtenances.
The final phase of the project is to design of wastewater treatment plant. A site
on the bank of the river is allocated for the Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP).
Both industrial and municipal waste water will be treated in this plant and will
be discharged into the river after treatment. The report doesn’t contain the
design of ETP as it was not possible to complete this portion within the
schedule of the course. But a field visit was arranged by Environmental
Division to see the various design elements of an effluent treatment plant. The
site was Central Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP) at Savar, Dhaka on the
bank of Dhaleshwari River. The visit was made during operation phase so we
were able to observe the functions of different steps of waste water treatment.
Learning environmental engineering hydraulics design is the main focus of the
project. To provide quality water and proper management of the wastewater are
vital issues especially in the context of Bangladesh. No doubt this project has
high lightened both of these topics. This project has undoubtedly made us
confident to face the challenges in the field of water supply and sanitation. The
visit to a mega-project like Central Effluent Treatment Plant has broadened our
horizon in the field of environmental engineering.
4
CHAPTER 1
PREPARATION OF ORGANOGRAM
CE - 432 C- 1: Organogram
Objective
An organogram is a diagram that explains the relationship between different
people in an organization. An organogram describes the jobs of each
establishment at different levels and describes their relationships. It is generally
known as Organizational Chart.
Description of Organogram
Chairman, assisted by Board of Trustee is at the top of the organogram. A
managing director is responsible for the performance of the company, as
dictated by the board’s overall strategy. He reports to Chairman through Board
of Trustee. There are five wings in the company namely:
1. Administrative Wing
2. Commercial Wing
3. Industrial Wing
4. Human Resource Management Wing
5. Management and Social Welfare Wing
Administrative Wing: It is comprised of two departments; Executive

Department and Personnel Department. Each department is headed by a Head of
Department. The Head of Executive is assisted by Executive Assistants. The
employees like cleaner, peon, driver, security guard are under the Head of
personnel.
Commercial Wing: Commercial wing ids responsible for financial activities of

the company and there are three departments namely Foreign Bureau, Accounts
and Research Division. Each of the department is headed by a Head of
Department.
Industrial Wing: It is the largest wing in the company. It is responsible for the
production and quality of goods, maintenance of equipment. This wing consists
of Production, Engineering and Quality Control Department; each of them is
headed by a departmental head. Production Manager is responsible for all kind
activities related to the production of the goods, starting from spinning to
storing of finished products. The engineering department is entrusted for the
maintenance of the machines of the industry. Quality Control Department is the
smallest department of this wing.
5
CE - 432 C- 1: Organogram
Human Resource Management Wing: It is responsible for ensuring that

employees of the industry are well versed in their expertise. The compensation,
benefits, safety, payroll, recruiting, training, promotion of employees are
managed by this department.
Management and social Welfare Wing: Environmental, social aspects the

industry is under this department. Hospital, school, religious and recreational
facilities in the industrial village are maintained by this wing.
6
Organogram of ‘Rongin Textile Limited'
CE - 432
Fis
Chairman (1)
Board of Trustee
(4)
Managing
Director (1)
MD’s Secretariat Directors, Consultants

(5)
Personal Secretary Personal Manager General Manager Fiscal Reviser (2)

(1) (1)
GM’s Secretary Industrial Wing Commercial Wing HR Management Administrative Management

(1) Wing Wing & Social
Welfare Wing
C- 1: Organogram
7
Administrative Wing Maintenance &
Social Welfare Wing
CE - 432
Head of Head of
Executive Personnel Head of M & SW
Section (1) (1)
Chief
Executive Staff
Security Social Chief
(5) Manager (1)
Officer (1) Environment
Welfare Medical
al officer (2)
Officer (4) Officer (1)
Executive
Security
Assistant Cleaner (68) Peon (17) Driver (50)
Guard (50)
(10) Assistant (2) Doctor (3)
Nurse (10)
C- 1: Organogram
8
CE - 432
Industrial
UtiSWing
Production Engineering Quality Control

Manager Section Manager
Spinning Sample Manufa Washing Knitting Utility Vehicle Machine Quality

Dying Store
& cturing Shed & Section Executive Executive Control
Mgr. Manager
Manager Pattern Mgr. Mgr. Weaving (1) (1) (1) Mgr. (1)
Mgr. Mgr.
APM (1) Supervisor

APM (1) APM (1) APM (1) APM (1) APM (1) Asst. Floor
Electrical Water Controller
Engineer
Section Section (5)
(6)
Supervisor Sample Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor
(7) (7) (7) (7) (5)
(7) man Line
(10) Electrical Engineer Techni Controller
Engineer cian (10)
Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Helper (2) (2)
(36)
(50) Helper (50) (50) (50) (50) (50)
(5)
Inspector
(30)
Helper Helper Helper Helper Helper
Staff (5) Staff (5)
C- 1: Organogram
(25) (25) (25) (25) (25)
9
Commercial Wing Management Wing
CE - 432
Head of Head of Research Head of R&D

Head of Head of
Foreign Accounts (1) Officer (4) Recruitment Department
Training (1) Promotion
Bureau (1) (1) (8)
Executive (5) Buying (1) Selling (1) Executive Executive Executive

(5) (5) (5)
Merchandise Executive (5)

Executive (5) Executive Executive Executive
(5)
Assistant (5) Assistant (5) Assistant (5)
Merchandise Merchandise
(10) (10)
C- 1: Organogram
10
CHAPTER 2
DRAWING LAYOUT
CE - 432 C- 2: Layout
Objective
Drawing the layout of the industrial village is one of the preliminary tasks of the
design. The industrial village. The importance of a layout would be better
appreciated if one understands the influence of an efficient layout on the
manufacturing function: it makes it smooth and efficient. The advantages of an
ideal layout are –
 Economics in manufacturing process in industrial zone
 Effective use of available land property
 Minimization of time delay
 Avoidance of bottlenecks
 Better production
 Better supervision
 Improved employee morale
 Prosperous society
 Efficient distribution of resources
 Advanced security
 Ensuring healthy environment
Characteristics
There are some characteristics of our drawn layout. These are given here:
 Administrative Zone, Industrial Zone (Including individual
units), Residential Zone, Common Service Area, etc. are shown in layout.
 A highway is on one side of the village and a river flowing along another
side. The width of highway is assumed 72’.
 Internal road network is clearly visible in the layout. All internal road width
50’.
 The ETP location is such that the final treated effluent can be discharged in
the adjacent river.
 The road network is designed considering route for incoming raw material
and outgoing finished products.
 In the residential zone separate types of quarters is allocated for employees
of different administrative status.
 Common facilities like School, Mosque, Hospital, Community center, Bank,
ATM, Super store, Parking, Canteen etc. is included.
 Provisions of parks, playing fields, green spaces, gardens is kept in the
village.
 Provisions for future land area expansion for different types of zones (e.g.
residential, industrial) is kept while preparing the layout.
12
 The layout follows grid pattern, which is advantageous while

designing pipe network for water distribution and wastewater
collection.
 The layout is drawn using AutoCAD. Proper layering is incorporated in the
drawing so that different parts like: overall layout, water distribution
network, sewer network can be separately visible if needed.
Steps
 The primary step was to determine the necessary zones in our industrial village.
Industrial zone is the main part of the village. The other parts of the village get
mobilized centering this part.
 The industrial zone consists of various departments like
 Dying
 Washing
 Spinning
 Sample and Pattern recognition
 Knitting
 Weaving
 Manufacturing
 Storage
 Parking
The departments are positioned such a way that it maximizes production rate and
minimizes time and cost due to production and transportation purposes.
 For the residential purpose of the workers and the officers, the residential zone
is provided. Due to ranking difference between them we have provided 4
different classes of quarters for employees with family and dorm for the
bachelors except 1st class officers.
 There is a playground kept between the industrial and residential zone to keep
the environment of residential zone cool, calm and healthy.
 The 1st class and 2nd class employees were given quarters beside river for better
environment.
 The hospital is also near from the residential place of 1st class officers.
 A separate park is provided between the 1st and 2nd class residential zone.
 For good security system we have provided guard room on each of the
entrances.
 Adequate common services should be provided to the dwellers for improved
living condition. For these we have provided various kinds of facilities like
13
Mosque, School, Canteen, Super shop, Parking space, Bank and ATM, Fire
services, Power station etc. in our village. These facilities are also placed by
considering the convenience of the residents and workers.
 We have provided space future extension of different facilities.
 The ETP is just by the side of river so that the final treated effluent can be
discharged in the adjacent river.
 Firefighting station is provided at a location which is advantageous to deal
accidents in any place of the village within the minimum time.
14
North
Figure 2.1: Layout of Rongin Industrial Village

Scale: 0 m 50 m 100m
River
1250 m
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
class Park Hospital Fire
class class 1st class ETP
emp. emp. emp. Service Power
dorm. employee
quarter quarter quarter Station
Guard and
Substation
Guard
Dying
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd and
class class class Washing
Future
emp. emp. emp. Extension Future
dorm. quarter quarter extension
Spinning
Playground Sample &

Storage
800 m
4th 4th 4th pattern Sec.
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. Knitting
quarter quarter Parking Canteen
and
Manufacturing
Weaving
Super
Guard Shop
Canteen Garden Administrative Chairman's

Parking
Building Office
Parking
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
future
and
C- 2: Layout
15
Garden Guard extension
ATM Guard
Highway
CHAPTER 3
POPULATION ESTIMATION
CE - 432 C- 3: Population Estimation
Objective
Estimation of population of the industrial village is the first task for the design of
water supply, sanitation and sewerage system. The organogram of the industrial
village is the basis for the estimation of the population. Population estimation and
prediction for future is an essential element for planning an industrial village so
that it can accommodate the future water demands.
Principles
There are some fundamentals of estimating population. These are given here:
I. Population calculation should be made for each zones, i.e. Residential,

Administrative, Industrial, and Common Services.
II. For the residential zone proper considerations should be made in

calculating family size and accommodation size of different staff members.
III. The assumptions (% of worker/staff staying inside or outside the village)

should be clearly stated for each calculation.
IV. Future population calculation should be made with a set of assumptions on

increase of population in different zones of the village.
V. For the administrative, industrial, and common service zones proper

considerations should be made for calculating the number of staffs
working.
Assumptions
The Organogram was the base line in determining the total population of the
industrial village. The industrial village is situated in Narayanganj District. So,
assumptions were made on the statistics available for Narayanganj. Considering
various assumptions the present population of the industrial village is estimated
along with future projections for 10 years interval. The design life is 20 years.
Average family size (in Narayanganj, Bangladesh) = 4.34 persons/family [3-1]. The
annual population growth rate of Bangladesh is estimated to 1.6% in 2015 [3-2].
But rather than using exactly these values, due to some practical considerations
we have used some modified figures in our calculation. The assumptions with
sample calculation of population estimation for the different zones i.e.
Administrative, Industrial, Common Services, Residential zones of industrial
village are provided below.
17
Residential zone
There are mainly four classes of residents.
1st class:
a) Designation of allotted employee: Chairman, Board of trustee, MD,
Director, Consultant etc.
b) 100% have residential facilities
c) No dorm
d) Family member = 7
e) Growth rate = 0.7%
2nd class:
a) Designation of allotted employee: Managers, Heads and Chiefs
c) 80% have family quarter, 20% have dorm
d) Family member = 5.7
e) Growth rate for family quarter = 1.2%
f) The dorm capacity has increased by 5 units in every 10 years.
3rd class:
a) Designation of allotted employee: Managers, Heads and Chiefs
c) Among them 60% have family quarter, 40% have dorm
4th class:
a) Designation of allotted employee: Operator, Worker, Guard, Helper
c) Among them 40% have family quarter, 60% have dorm
Administrative zone
1) Growth predicted after 10 years = 20%

18
Industrial zone

Common Services

Used Formula
n
For a certain design period, Future population = P * (1 + r)
Where, P = Present population, r = Growth rate (%), n = Design period (years)
Sample Calculation
For 1st class quarter of residential zone,
1st class officers:
 Chairman (1)
 Board of trustee (4)
 Managing director (1)
 Director/Consultants (5)
 Fiscal revisers (2)
 General manager (1)
Total employee number = 14
Accommodation given 100%
Assumed family member = 7
Total present population = 14*7 = 98
Annual growth rate = 0.70%
Population after 10 years = 98*(1+0.007)*10 = 105
Population after 20 years = 98*(1+0.007)*20 = 113
19
Table 3.1: Population Estimation for Administrative Zone

Designation Number Designation Number
Chairman 1 Head of MSW 1
Board of trustees 4 Environmental Specialist 2
Managing Director 1 Assistant 2
P.S (MD) 1 Social Welfare Officer 4
Project Manager 1 Chief Medical Officer 1
Directors/Consultants 5 Chief of CW 1
General Manager 1 Head 2
PS (GM) 1 Manager 2
Office Assistant 1 Executive 15
Fiscal Reviser 2 Merchandiser 25
Research 4
Head of Industrial Section 1
Production Manager 1 Head 2
Head of Engineering Section 1 Executive 5
Quality Control Manager 1 Executive Assistant 10
Staff manager 1
Human Resource Manager 1 Cleaner 68
Head 3 Peon 17
Executive 15 Driver 50
Executive Assistant 15 Chief Security Officer 1
R&D 8 Security Guard 50
Summary of Estimation for Administrative Zone

Total Current Population 327
Growth after 10 years (Assumed) 20%
Population after 10 years 392
20
Table 3.2: Population Estimation for Industrial Zone

Head of Industrial Section 1 Engineering Section
Production Head 1
Production Manager 1 Executive officer 3
Managers 7 Engineers 4
APM 6 Assistant Engineers 6
Supervisor 50 Staff 10
Sample Man 10 Technicians 36
Operator 400 ETP
Helpers 145 Head 1
Quality Control Quality Control Officer 5
Quality Control Manager 1 Supervisor 5
Floor Controller 5 Maintenance Staff 15
Line Controller 10 Worker 7
Inspector 30
Summary of Estimation for Industrial Zone

21
Table 3.3: Population Estimation for Common Services

School Hospital
Student 600 Doctor 3
Headmaster and Ast. Head 2 Nurse/Assistant 10
Teacher 20 Fire Service
Staff 15 Chief 1
Mosque Fire Fighter 10
Imam 3 Staff 5
Staff 5 Park
Bank & ATM Gardener 2
Head 1 Maintenance Staff 2
Officer 10 Guard 2
Staff 15
Security 4
Canteen
Manager 3
Cook 6
Staff 20
Summary of Population Estimation for Common Services

Growth after 10 years 10%
Growth after 20 years 20%
22
Table 3.4: Population Estimation for Residential Zone

1st class 2nd class
Chairman,
Board of Managers,
Resident Type trustee, MD, Resident Type Heads and
Director, Chiefs
Consultant etc.
Total number of Total number of
14 55
employee employee
% having residential % having residential
100 100
facilities facilities
% having family % having family
100 80
quarter quarter
% having dorm 0 % having dorm 20
Residential Residential
14 40
employee(quarter) employee(quarter)
Assumed family Assumed family
7 5.7
member member
Total Present Total Present
98 228
Population Population
Annual Growth rate Annual Growth rate
0.007 0.012
(Assumed) (Assumed)
Population after 10 Population after 10
105 256.89
years years
113 289.43
years years
Dorm. Population 0 Dorm. Population 15
0 20
years years
0 25
years years
23
Table 3.4: Population Estimation for Residential Zone (Contd.)

3rd class 4th class
Operators,
Managers,
Workers,
Resident Type Heads and Resident Type
Guards and
Chiefs.
Helpers.
Total number of Total number of
378 823
employee employee
% having residential % having residential
75 75
facilities facilities
% having family % having family
60 40
quarter quarter
% having dorm 40 % having dorm 60
Residential Residential
170 47
employee(quarter) employee(quarter)
Assumed family Assumed family
5.7 5.7
member member
Total Present Total Present
970 1407
Population Population
Annual Growth rate Annual Growth rate
0.015 0.017
(Assumed) (Assumed)
1125 1666
years years
1306 1972
years years
Dorm. Population 180 Dorm. Population 370
225 435
years years
270 500
years years
24
4th class dorm 1st class quarter 2nd class quarter

11.3% 3.0% 7.0%
2nd class dorm

0.5%
3rd class quarter

29.7%
4th class quarter

43.1%
3rd class dorm

5.5%
Figure 3.1: Population percentages in

residential zone
25
Table 3.5: Summary of Population Calculation
CE - 432
Residential
1st 2nd
3rd class 4th class
Time/Zones class class
Industrial
Administrative
Dorm
Dorm
Dorm
Dorm
Common Services
Family
Family
Family
Family
Present 98 0 228 15 970 180 1407 370 327 759 739
10 years
105 0 257 20 1125 225 1666 435 392 911 887
later
20 years
113 0 289 25 1306 270 1972 500 458 1063 1035
later
26
C- 3: Population Estimation
CHAPTER 4
WATER DEMAND CALCULATION
CE - 432 C- 4: Water Demand
Objective
The first step in the design of a water-works system is an estimate of the
requirement for water. The Water Demand calculation is based on population
estimation and daily goods production. The water demand influences decisions
regarding water well design, pumping schedule and supply system. Water
demands were calculated using appropriate assumptions and suitable peak
factors.
Classification of Water Demand
Water requirement can be classified as:
 Residential water demand
 Industrial water demand
 Administrative water demand
 Water demand for common services
 Water demand for fire fighting
Now all the calculations of water demand are briefly described with essential
charts for Residential, Industrial and Common services.
Residential water demand

Assumptions
a) Water requirements for daily domestic use of a building shall be
assessed on the basis of number of occupants according to their occupancy
classification and their water requirements as specified in Table‐ 8.5.1(a) to
Table‐ 8.5.1(d) in BNBC[4-1].
b) 1st class apartment is single family dwelling with garden & car washing.
From BNBC per capita consumption is 260 lpcd with full facility [4-2]. But
family size per apartment is estimated to be 7 which are greater than average
family size in a city. So per capita consumption is assumed to be 350 lpcd.
c) 2nd class apartments are category a2 big multi-family apartment (>2500 sft)
with full facility. From BNBC per capita consumption is 200 lpcd [4-3].
d) 3rd class apartments are category b1 officer's colony & moderate apartment (<
2000 sft) with restricted facility. From BNBC per capita consumption is 135
lpcd [4-4].
e) 4th class apartments are category c1 junior staff quarter (< 1000 sft) &
temporary shade with restricted facility. From BNBC per capita consumption is
80 lpcd [4-5].
f) 2nd and 3rd class dorms are category A1 hostels with restricted facility. From
BNBC per capita consumption is 70 lpcd [4-6].
28
g) 4th class dorms are assumed to have per capita consumption of 50 lpcd [4-7].
h) Peak for residential zone is 2.5[4-8].
Sample Calculation
For 1st class quarter (Table 3.4),
Present population = 98
Population after 10 years = 105
Per capita consumption = 350 lpcd
Duration = 24 hours
Average present water demand = 98*350 = 34300 lpd
Average Demand after 10 years = 105 *350 = 36778 lpd
Average Demand after 20 years = 113 *350 = 39435 lpd
Peak factor = 2.5
Peak present water demand = 34300*2.5 = 85750 lpd
Peak demand after 20 years = 36778*2.5 = 91945 lpd
Peak Demand after 20 years = 39435*2.5 = 98588 lpd
Industrial Water Demand

Water requirement for industrial purpose should include two aspects:
 Water for industrial production
 Water for personal consumption
Water for Industrial Production
Assumptions
a) 2200 Kg of finished product per day.
b) 300 liter water is required per kg finished product [4-9].
c) Industry will grow be 1.4 times in every 10 years.
d) Peak factor is assumed to be 1.4 [4-10].
Sample Calculation
Present production rate = 2200 kg/day
Water requirement = 300 liter/ kg
Present water consumption = 2200*300 = 660000 liter/day
Peak present water demand = 660000*1.4 = 924000 liter/day
Production rate after 10 years = 2200 *1.4 = 3080 kg/day
Water consumption after 10 years = 3080 * 300 = 924000 kg/day
Peak water demand after 10 years = 924000*1.4 = 129360
29
Water for Personal Consumption

Assumptions
a) 2 shifts; each 8 hours.
b) It is in occupancy G1: Low hazard industries in BNBC and per capita
consumption is 45 lpcd [4-11]
c) Peak factor is assumed to be 1.4 [4-12]
Sample calculation
From Table 3.2, Present total workers = 759
No. of shift = 2
Duration of each shift = 8 hours
Time factor =24/ (8*2) =1.5
Peak factor = 1.4
Present water demand = 759*40*1.5 = 45540 lpd
Peak water demand = 45540*1.4 = 63756 lpd
Administrative water demand
Assumptions
a) From BNBC, Occupancy Category is F1: Office and per capita consumption
is 45 lpcd [4-13]
b) Peak factor is assumed to be 1.4 [4-14]
Calculation
From Table 3.1, Present population = 327
Time factor = 24/3 = 8
Average present demand = 3*327*45 = 44145 lpd
Peak Factor = 1.4
Peak present demand = 44145 *1.4 =61803 lpd
Peak present demand = 52920 *1.4 = 74088 lpd
Peak present demand = 61830 *1.4 = 86562 lpd
30
Water demand for common services

Assumptions
a) Per capita consumption of various services are estimated according to BNBC [4-15].
b) School is assumed to be fall in category B2 with restricted facility and per
capita consumption is 35 lpcd [4-16].
c) Mosque is assumed to be E3 (Large assembly without fixes seat) with restricted
facility and per capita consumption is 5lpcd [4-17].
d) Bank falls in category F1: Offices with full facility in BNBC and per capita
consumption is 35 lpcd [4-18].
e) Hospital is in category D1: Normal medical with restricted facility and per
f) Canteen is assumed to be in category K1: Miscellaneous without restricted
facility and per capita consumption is 5 lpcd [4-20].
g) Fire station is assumed to be in category F5: Essential services with full facility
and per capita consumption is 70 lpcd [4-21].
h) Power station is in category J1: Hazardous building with full facility in BNBC
and per capita consumption is 8 lpcd [4-22].
i) ETP is assumed to be in category K1: Miscellaneous with full facility and per
j) Shop is in category F2: Small shop and market with full facility and per capita
consumption is 45 lpcd [4-24].
k) Based on practical consideration per capita consumption in park is assumed
to be 12 lpcd.
Sample calculation
For canteen, Present population = 100 (table 3.3)
Per capita consumption = 5 lpd
Duration = 8 hours
Average present demand = 100*5*24/8 =1500 lpd
Peak factor = 4
Peak present demand =1500 *4 = 6000 lpd
Water demand for fire fighting
Assumption [4-25]
a) Only one fire incidence occurs per day.
b) Each station/ facility should be served by two fire hydrants at a time.
c) Nozzle diameter of the hydrant is 3 inches.
d) Velocity of water in the pipe is 3 fps.
e) Each hydrant will supply water for 30 minutes.
31
Calculation
Diameter 3" and flow velocity 3 fps
Flow occurs for 30 min
Volume of water flowing in one hydrant = Q*t = π x (3/12) ^2/4x 3 x 30 x 60
= 265 cft
Number of fire hydrants = 2
Total volume of water required for firefighting = 2*265.07 = 530.14 cft * 28.317
= 15012 liter
Positioning of Fire Hydrants
The distance between two fire hydrants should be max 300' (100 m) and distance
from any point of the road should not exceed 150' (50 m) [4-26]. We also need to
ensure that from an arbitrary point at least two fire hydrants are reachable at any
time.
Considering this facts we have placed fire hydrants in our village and the
positions of fire hydrants are shown in the layout in figure 4.1.
32
CE - 432
Table 4.1: Residential Water Demand Calculation
Lpd
lpcd
years, Lpd
years, Lpd
years, Lpd
years, Lpd
Building Type
Duration, hours
Apartment/Dorm
Present Population
Peak Demand after 10
Per Capita Consumption,

Population after 10 years
Population after 20 years
Average Demand after 10

Average Demand after 20
Average Present Demand,

Peak Present Demand, Lpd
1st
98 350 24 34300 85750 105 36778 91945 113 39435 98588
class
2nd
228 200 24 45600 114000 257 51377 128443 289 57886 144716
class
3rd
970 135 24 130892 327230 1125 151905 379764 1306 176292 440731
Apartment
class
4th
1407 80 24 112586 281466 1666 133259 333147 1972 157727 394317
class
2nd and
195 70 24 13650 34125 245 17150 42875 295 20650 51625
3rd
Dorm
4th
370 50 24 18518 46294 435 21750 54375 500 25000 62500
class
Total - - - - - 888865 - - 1030548 - - 1192476
C- 4: Water Demand
33
CE - 432
Table 4.2: Industrial Water Demand Calculation

Water Use for Industrial Production
Future Production
Present Water Requirement Future Water Demand (lpd)
Rate (kg/d) Present Water Demand
Production for production
After 10 After 20 (lpd) After 20
Rate (kg/d) (litre per kg) After 10 years
years years years
2,200 3080 4312 300 660000 924000 1293600
Water Use for Personal Consumption
Total Workers Present Future Water Demand (lpd)
Total Per Capita
No. of Time Water
Workers at After 10 After 20 Consumption After 20
Shifts Factor Demand After 10 years
Present years years (lpcd) years
(lpd)
759 911 1063 2 1.5 40 45540 54660 63780
Industrial Water Demand Summary
Peak
Peak
Peak Water Water
Total Industrial Water At After 10 After 20 Peak Factor Water
Demand after Demand
Demand Present years years (Assumed) Demand
10 years after 10
(lpd) at Present
years
705540 978660 1357380 1.4 987756 1370124 1900332
C- 4: Water Demand
34
Table 4.3: Water Demand Calculation for Common Services
CE - 432
Lpd
lpcd
years
years
Facility
years, Lpd
years, Lpd
10 years, Lpd
20 years, Lpd
Demand, Lpd
Duration (hrs)
Average Present
Present Population
Population after 10
Population after 20

Average Demand after

Average Demand after
Peak Present Demand,
Per Capita Consumption

School 700 35 8 73500 294000 750 78750 315000 800 84000 336000
Mosque 250 5 5 6000 24000 250 6000 24000 250 6000 24000
Bank 50 45 8 6750 27000 60 8100 32400 70 9450 37800
Hospital 30 225 24 6750 27000 30 6750 27000 30 6750 27000
Canteen 100 5 8 1500 6000 100 1500 6000 100 1500 6000
Fire Station 30 70 24 2100 8400 40 2800 11200 50 3500 14000
Power station 25 8 24 200 800 30 240 960 35 280 1120
ETP 20 8 24 160 640 25 200 800 30 240 960
Shop 30 45 8 4050 16200 35 4725 18900 40 5400 21600
Park 150 12 5 8640 34560 200 11520 46080 250 14400 57600
Total Demand - - - - 438600 - - 482340 - - 526080
C- 4: Water Demand
35
North
Figure 4.1: Position of hydrants ( ) in layout

River
1250 m
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
dorm. employee
Guard and
Substation
Guard
Dying
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd and
Future
Spinning
Playground Sample &

Storage
800 m
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. Knitting
and Park
Manufacturing
Weaving
Super
Guard Shop

Parking
Building Office
Parking
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
future
and
C- 4: Water Demand
36
ATM Guard
Highway
CE - 432
Table 4.4: Water Demand Summary

Present Demand Demand after 10 Demand after 20
Zones
(lpd) years (lpd) years (lpd)
Residential 888865 1030548 1192476
Industrial 987756 1370124 1900332
Administrative 61803 74088 86562
Common Services 438600 482340 526080
Fire fighting 15012 15012 15012

C- 4: Water Demand
37
CE - 432
Figure 4.2: Comparison of Water Demand in different zones

2000
1800 Water Demand Summary Present Demand (lpd)
1600 Water Demand Summary Demand after 10 years

(lpd)
1400
Water Demand Summary Demand after 20 years
(lpd)
1200
1000
800
600
400
Water Demand in thousands

200
0
Residential Industrial Administrative Common Services
C- 4: Water Demand
38
CHAPTER 5
WATER WELL DESIGN AND
REPORT ON PUMPING STATION
VISIT
CE - 432 C- 5: Water Well Design and Pumping Station Visit
Objective
Well design means selecting the proper dimensional factors for well structure and
choosing the materials to be used in its construction. Prime considerations of well
design are, Service life, Cost and Performance. A properly designed well serves
the following:
a) Allows the water to enter at low velocity
b) Prevents the entry of sand
c) Serve as the structural retainer to support the loose formation material.
Water well is a hole, shaft, or excavation used for the purpose of extracting
ground water from the subsurface. Water may flow to the surface naturally after
excavation of the hole or shaft. Such a well is known as a Flowing artesian well.
More commonly, water must be pumped out of the well.
Most wells are vertical shafts, but they may also be horizontal or at an inclined
angle. Horizontal wells are commonly used in bank filtration, where surface water
is extracted via recharge through river bed sediments into horizontal wells located
underneath or next to a stream.
The main objective of this design is to determine the position of strainer through
which water can flow at an attainable velocity. To determine strainer position,
soil classification is done according to the data provided. Afterwards, we have
determined yield of well and number of well for different zone at different time
span of project. Number of well largely depends on the pumping hours of a well
and minimum distance of a well from a remote point.
Scope of the Study
Water well design has been done considering an industrial area of 100 hectare
having four distinguishing zones named as Industrial Zone, Common Service
Zone, Residential zone and Administrative Zone. We considered here that
Industrial, Administrative and Common Service (Hospital, Canteen, Fire
Station, Power station, ETP, Shop),Fire Service for this zone will be one side of
the respected area and Residential, Common Services(School, Mosque, Bank,
Park, Canteen, Shop), Fire service for this zone will be on the other side.
39
So the Scope of the study can be presented below as:

 Grain size distribution for different soil layers
 Locating the aquifer and water bearing strata
 Determination of strainer length and position
 Design of gravel pack material
 Selection of strainer size
 Yield of well
Types of Aquifer
Ground water aquifers may be classified as either water table or artesian
aquifers.
i) Water-table Aquifer/Unconfined Aquifer
A water-table aquifer is one which is not confined by an upper impermeable layer.
Hence it is also called unconfined aquifer.
ii) Water Table

Water in unconfined aquifer is virtually at atmospheric pressure and the upper
surface of the zone of saturation is called the Water Table. The water table marks
the highest level to which water will rise in a well constructed in a water table
aquifer.
iii) Artesian Aquifer/Confined or Pressure Aquifers

An artesian aquifer is one in which the water is confined under a pressure greater
than atmospheric by an overlying, relatively impermeable layer. Hence such
aquifers are also called confined or pressure aquifers. Unlike water-table aquifers,
water in artesian aquifers will rise in wells to levels above the bottom of the upper
confining layer. This is because of the pressure created by that confining layer
and is the distinguishing feature between the two types of aquifers.
iv) Piezometric Surface

The imaginary surface to which water will rise to wells located throughout an
artesian aquifer is called the piezometric surface. This surface may be either
above or below the ground surface at different parts of the same aquifer.
40
v) Flowing Artesian Well

Where the piezometric surface lies above the ground surface, a well tapping the
aquifer will flow at ground level and is referred to as a flowing artesian well.
vi) Non-Flowing Artesian Well

Where the piezometric surface lies below the ground surface a non-flowing
artesian well results and some means of lifting water, such as pump, must be
provided to lift water from well.
Methodology
Grain Size Distribution for Different Soil Layer
Grain size distribution curves are drawn for different soil layers using soil data.
Effective grain size (D10, D30, D60) and uniformity coefficient are found for each
layer. From Grain Size Distribution data, we can choose the water bearing soil
layer.
For Determining Water Bearing Soil Layer, we have to know relative
percentage of different particles using MIT classification of soil.
MIT Classification of soil is presented below:
Table 5.1: MIT Classification

Silt/Clay < 0.06 mm
Fine Sand 0.06 – 0.20 mm
Medium Sand 0.20 – 0.60 mm
Course Sand 0.60 – 2.00 mm
Fine Gravel > 2.00 mm
Locating the Aquifer and Water Bearing Strata

During the determination of the location of aquifer is that chosen layer must have
good water carrying capacity, good permeability. On the other hand, it should be
economic enough that means if we found suitable layer nearer to the water table,
we need not to go deep down to extract water. The more we go downwards, water
quality may get deteriorated.
Factors to be considered for locating water bearing strata are given below:
 Greater uniformity coefficient increases permeability.
 Higher fineness modulus means bigger soil particles.
41
 Higher percentage of course and medium sand indicates higher water carrying
capacity.
Table 5.2: Soil Classification according to Fineness Modulus

Values
F.M. <1 Clay and Silt
F.M.=1 Fine Sand With Silt
Medium to course sand which has potential to
F.M.>1
good permeability and presence of water
Determination of Strainer Length and Position

 Primary factors:
1. Length of casing pipe must be selected first.
2. Casing pipe must be sufficient enough so that submersible pump always remain
below water.
 Length of the casing pipe is the summation of four lengths:
1. Static water level at present.
2. Assumed drawdown of 10’ to 15’ [5-1] while pumping each time.
3. Average rate of water level declination (per year) * Design life [5-2]
4. Safety distance of 10’to 15’ [5-3]
After the length of the casing pipe and depth of the submersible pump being
ensured, we can think about Strainer Position.
 Limitation of strainer length
Table 5.3: Recommended Screening according to
Aquifer Thickness
Recommended
Aquifer Thickness
Screening
<25’ 70% Screening
25’-50’ 75% Screening
>50’ 80% Screening
 As it is very difficult to maintain the vertical alignment of a long strainer,

it will not be practical to go beyond 100’screening [5-4]
 Strainer should not be extended up to the bottom of the aquifer to allow the
upward converging flow of water during pumping.
Between two strainers of a discontinuous aquifer a Blank Pipe is provided.
Blank pipe is placed at the bottom of the strainer to trap particles that may enter
into the pipe through upward converging flow.
42
Design of Gravel Pack Material

To design the gravel pack material, the grain size distribution curve of the
comparatively finest layer within the aquifer is drawn on a semi log paper.
Some assumptions were made before this calculation:
 70% (D30) [5-5] size of the finest sand is multiplied by a factor 4-6 [5-6]
depending on the sand type. This is the first point on the curve that represents
the grading of the artificial gravel pack material.
 Through this initial point on the gravel pack curve, a smooth curve nearly
parallel with the aquifer material curve is drawn by trial and error method,
representing a material with a uniformity coefficient 2.5 or less [5-7].
 3-8 [5-8] inch diameter envelop of gravel will surround the entire screen.
Yield of Well
Well yield is calculated using strainer opening area. Yield of a well can be
calculated as follows:
Yield = (area of strainer x flow velocity) / factor of safety [5-9]
The factor of safety is considered assuming blockage while operation.
Different slot size have different opening area. Consideration of slot opening
area is given below:
Table 5.4: Screen Opening according to Slot Size

Slot Size Assumed Opening(Steel Screening)
40 slot 20%
30 slot 15%
20 slot 10%
Data Analysis and Calculation
a) Sample Calculation of Grain Size Distribution

At 280 feet depth,
Grain size distribution at different depth is done based on the soil property data
provided. The main focus of this analysis is to select the suitable water bearing
layer.
Total Material Retained at #16, #30, #40, #50, #100, #200 and Pan
= 0+0.7+6.2+36+51.9+5.2+0.2=100.2 gm.
43
Percent of Material Retained = (0.7/100.2)*100 % =0.7%

Cumulative Percent Retained at #16 Sieve = 0.00+0.70= 0.70%
Percent Finer at #16 Sieve= 100-0.70 = 99.30
Fineness Modulus (Only Standard Sieve #16, #30, #50, #100)
= (0.00+0.70+42.81+94.61) = 1.38
From Graph, Using Table 5.1, we have found the Percentage of Fine Sand,
Medium Sand and Course Sand.
From Graph, D10 = 0.17 mm, D30 = 0.22 mm, D60 = 0.31 mm
Uniformity Co-efficient, Cu =D60/D10 = 1.82
44
Table 5.5: Grain Size Distribution Table at a Depth 280 ft

Sieve Material Cumulative
Sieve Percent Percent Fineness Values from
Size Retained Percent
No. Retained Finer (%) Modulus Graph
(mm) (gm) Retained (%)
#16 1.18 0 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.17 mm
#30 0.60 0.7 0.70 0.70 99.30 D30 = 0.22 mm
#40 0.43 6.2 6.19 6.89 93.11 D60 = 0.31 mm
#50 0.30 36 35.93 42.81 57.19
Cu = 1.82
#100 0.15 51.9 51.80 94.61 5.39
Fine Sand=
#200 0.075 5.2 5.19 99.80 0.20 1.38
21%
Medium
Sand=79%
Pan 0.00 0.2 0.20 100.00 0.00
Course
Sand=0%
Total 100.2
Grain Size Distribution Chart at a Depth 280'

150
140 Med
130
From Graph
120
i)Fine
Percent Finer(%)
110
100 Sand:
90 21%
80 ii)Course
70 Sand: 0%
60 iii)Medium
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
Figure 5.1: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 280 ft
45
Table 5.6: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 300 ft

Material Percent Cumulative Percent
Sieve Sieve Fineness Values from
Retained Retained Percent Finer
No. Size(mm) Modulus Graph
(gm) (%) Retained(%) (%)
16 1.18 0 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.19 mm
30 0.60 1 1.00 1.00 99.00 D30 = 0.28 mm
40 0.43 12.8 12.81 13.81 86.19 D60 = 0.36 mm
50 0.30 51.9 51.95 65.77 34.23
Cu = 1.89
100 0.15 32.7 32.73 98.50 1.50 1.65
Fine Sand= 11 %
200 0.075 1.4 1.40 99.90 0.10
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100.00 0.00 Medium Sand=
88%
Total: 99.9
Course Sand=1%
Grain Size Distribution at Depth 300 ft

150
140
130
120
From
110
Percent Finer(%)
Graph,
100
i) Fine
90
Sand:
80
11%
70
60 ii)
50 Medium
40 Sand:
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
Figure 5.2: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 300 ft.
46
Table 5.7 : Grain Size Distribution at Depth 410 ft.

Percent
Sieve Material Cumulative Percent
Sieve Retaine Fineness Values From
Size Retaine Percent Finer
No. d Modulus Graph
(mm) d (gm) Retained,% (%)
(%)
16 1.18 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.18 mm
30 0.60 1.40 1.40 1.40 98.60 D30 = 0.24 mm
40 0.43 10.70 10.73 12.14 87.86 D60 = 0.33 mm
50 0.30 40.30 40.42 52.56 47.44
Cu = 1.83
100 0.15 45.30 45.44 97.99 2.01 1.52
Fine Sand= 17 %
200 0.075 1.90 1.91 99.90 0.10
Medium Sand=
Pan 0.00 0.10 0.10 100.00 0.00
82%
Total 99.7
Course Sand=1%

150
140
130
120 From
110 Graph,
100 i) Fine
Percent Finer (%)
90 Sand : 17%
80
ii) Medium
70
Sand: 82%
60
50 iiii) Coarse
40 sand: 1%
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
Figure 5.3: Grain Size Distribution at 410 ft
47

Percent Cumulative
Sieve Material Percent Fineness
Sieve Retaine Percent Values from
Size Retaine Finer Modulu
No. d Retained Graph
(mm) d (gm) (%) s
(%) (%)
16 1.18 0 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.19 mm
30 0.60 4.1 4.10 4.10 95.90 D30 = 0.29 mm
40 0.43 26.5 26.53 30.63 69.37
D60 = 0.40mm
50 0.30 38.5 38.54 69.17 30.83
Cu = 2.11
100 0.15 28.1 28.13 97.30 2.70 1.71
Fine Sand= 11 %
200 0.075 2.6 2.60 99.90 0.10
Medium Sand=
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100.00 0.00
87 %
Total 99.9
Course Sand=2%
Gravel Size Distribution at Depth 560 ft

150
140
130 From Graph,
120
110 i) Fine
Sand: 11%
100
Percent Finer (%)
90 ii) Medium
80 Sand: 87%
70
60 iii) Course
Sand: 2%
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
48

Cumulative
Sieve Material Percent Percent
Sieve Percent Fineness
Size Retained Retained Finer Values from Graph
No. Retained Modulus
(mm) (gm) (%) (%)
(%)
16 1.18 0.0 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.22 mm
30 0.60 4.6 4.61 4.61 95.39 D30 = 0.33 mm
40 0.43 25.2 25.28 29.89 70.11
D60 = 0.40 mm
50 0.30 46.8 46.94 76.83 23.17
1.80 Cu = 1.82
100 0.15 22.1 22.17 99.00 1.00
Fine Sand= 8 %
200 0.075 0.9 0.90 99.90 0.10
Medium Sand= 89 %
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100.00 0.00
Course Sand= 3 %
Total 99.7

150
140 From Graph,
130
120 i) Fine Sand:
110 8%
Percent Finer (%)
100
90 ii)Medium
80 Sand: 89%
70
iii) Course
60
Sand: 3%
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
49
Table 5.10: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 610 ft.

Cumulative
Sieve Percent Fineness
Size Retained Retained Finer Values from Graph
No. Retained Modulus
(mm) (gm) (%) (%)
(%)
16 1.18 0 0 0 100 D10 = 0.21 mm
30 0.60 17.5 17.53 17.53 82.46 D30 = 0.32 mm
40 0.43 25.9 25.95 43.48 56.51 D60 = 0.45 mm
50 0.30 30.2 30.26 73.74 26.25 Cu = 2.14
1.90
100 0.15 25.1 25.15 98.89 1.10 Fine Sand= 9 %
200 0.075 1 1.00 99.89 0.10 Medium Sand= 73%

Course Sand=
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100 0
18%
Total: 99.8
Grain Size Distribution at a Depth 610 ft

150
140 From
130 Graph,
120
i) Fine
Percent Finer(%)
110
100 Sand= 9%
90
80
ii) Medium
Sand= 73%
70
60
iii) Course
50
Sand= 18%
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
50
Table 5.11: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 630 ft.

Cumulative
Sieve Percent Fineness Values from
Size Retained Retained Finer
No. Retained Modulus Graph
(mm) (gm) (%) (%)
(%)
16 1.18 0 0 0 100 D10 = 0.2 mm
30 0.60 7.6 7.61 7.61 92.30 D30 = 0.31 mm
40 0.43 27.3 27.35 34.96 65.03
D60 = 0.4 mm
50 0.30 36.5 36.57 71.54 28.45
100 0.15 25.8 25.85 97.39 2.60 Cu = 2
200 0.075 2.5 2.50 99.89 0.10 Fine Sand= 10
1.76
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100 0
%
Medium
Total 99.8 Sand= 81%
Course Sand=
9%
150
140 From Graph,
130
i) Fine Sand=
120
10%
110
100 ii)Medium
Percent Finer(%)
90 Sand= 81%
80 iii) Course
70 Sand= 9%
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
51

Cumulative
Sieve Material Percent
Sieve Percent Percent Fineness Values from
Size Retained Retained
No. Retained Finer (%) Modulus Graph
(mm) (gm) (%)
(%)
16 1.18 0 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.18 mm
30 0.60 6.9 6.91 6.91 93.09
D30 = 0.28 mm
40 0.43 28.8 28.83 35.74 64.26
50 0.30 31.3 31.33 67.07 32.93 D60 = 0.41 mm
100 0.15 29.7 29.73 96.80 3.20 Cu = 2.28
200 0.075 3.1 3.10 99.90 0.10
Pan 0.00 0.1 0.10 100.00 0.00 Fine Sand= 12
1.71
%
Medium
Total 99.9 Sand= 80%
Course Sand=
8%
150
140 From Graph,
130
i)Fine
120
Sand=12%
110
Percent Finer(%)
100 ii)Medium
90
Sand=80%
80 iii)Course
70 Sand=8%
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size(mm)
52

Percent Cumulative
Sieve Retaine Percent Fineness
Size Retaine Finer Value from Graph
No. d Retained Modulus
(mm) d (gm) (%)
(%) (%)
16 1.18 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 D10 = 0.22 mm
30 0.60 14.00 14.06 14.06 85.94 D30 = 0.33 mm
40 0.43 26.90 27.01 41.06 58.94 D60 = 0.42 mm
50 0.30 37.20 37.35 78.41 21.59
Cu = 1.91
100 0.15 19.90 19.98 98.39 1.61 1.91
Fine Sand=8 %
200 0.075 1.50 1.51 99.90 0.10
Medium Sand=79
Pan 0.00 0.10 0.10 100.00 0.00
%
Total 99.6
Course Sand=13 %

150
140 From Graph,
130
120 i) Fine Sand=
8%
110
Percent Finer (%)
100 ii) Medium

90 Sand=79%
80
70 iii) Course
60 Sand=13%
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size (mm)
Figure 5.9: Grain Size Distribution at Depth 690
53

Percent Cumulative
Sieve Retaine Percent Fineness
Size Retaine Finer Value from Graph
No. d Retained Modulus
(mm) d (gm) (%)
(%) (%)
100.0 D10 = 0.22 mm
16 1.18 0.00 0.00 0.00
0
D30 = 0.35 mm
30 0.60 19.40 19.44 19.44 80.56
D60 = 0.48 mm
40 0.43 31.40 31.46 50.90 49.10
50 0.30 28.20 28.26 79.16 20.84 Cu = 2.18
100 0.15 20.00 20.04 99.20 0.80 1.98 Fine Sand=8 %
200 0.075 0.70 0.70 99.90 0.10 Medium Sand=72
Pan 0.00 0.10 0.10 100.00 0.00 %
Total 99.8 Course Sand=20
%
Grain Size Distribution Curve at Depth 720 ft

150
140 From Graph,
130
120
i) Fine
Sand= 8%
110
Percent Finer (%)
100 ii) Medium

90 Sand= 72%
80
iiii) Course
70 Sand= 20%
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.01 0.1
Particle Size (mm)1 10
54
b) Locating the Aquifer and Water Bearing Strata

All soil sample data are summarized in a table to find available water bearing
soil strata, presented below. From 300 to 610 feet depth, percent of medium
sand is in suitable percentage, F.M.>1(using Table 5.2) that means bigger soil
particle, Uniformity Co-efficient is greater that means good permeability. As
suitable layer is found at upper side, there is no need to go deep down to find
location of Aquifer.
Table 5.15: Summary of Grain Size Distribution

Sample Fineness D10 D30 D60 Uniformity Percent Percent Percent
Depth Modulus (mm) (mm) (mm) Co-efficient Course Medium Fine
(ft) Cu Sand (%) Sand sand
=D60/D10 (%) (%)
280 1.38 0.17 0.22 0.31 1.82 0 79 21

300 1.65 0.19 0.28 0.36 1.89 1 88 11
410 1.52 0.18 0.24 0.33 1.83 1 82 17
560 1.71 0.19 0.29 0.40 2.11 2 87 11
600 1.80 0.22 0.33 0.40 1.82 3 89 8
610 1.90 0.21 0.32 0.45 2.14 18 73 9
630 1.77 0.20 0.31 0.40 2.00 9 81 10
640 1.71 0.18 0.28 0.41 2.28 8 80 12
690 1.91 0.22 0.33 0.42 1.91 13 79 8
720 1.98 0.22 0.35 0.48 2.18 20 72 8
Location of Water Bearing Soil Layer 300 ft to 610 ft
55
c) Determination of Strainer Length and Position

Let, the static water level at 275’
Average rate of water level declination (per year) = 1m (3.28 ft.)
Design period= 20 years
Drawdown of 15’ while pumping each time
Safety distance of 15’
So length of the Housing pipe= (275+3.28*2+15+15) = 370.6’ or 375'
Aquifer depth= (610-300) = 310’, which is more than 50’.
So 80% of the aquifer screening can be made which gives the strainer length of
= (310 * 0.80) = 248'
But as we know that maximum safe length of the strainer is 100’.
4 inch diameter envelop of gravel pack material will surround the entire screen.
Length of Housing Pipe: 375 ft.

Length of the Strainer: 100 ft.
Strainer will cover at a Depth of 375 ft to 475 ft.
56
d) Design of Gravel Pack Material

The Layer having Lower Fineness Modulus of 1.52 and Greatest Uniformity
Co-efficient of 1.83 within the Aquifer Depth is selected for installation of the
Strainer at Sample depth 410 ft.
At a depth 410 ft, D30 was found 0.24 and this value is multiplied by 5[5-6] and
the value is found by 1.2.
Table 5.16: Finding the initial point on Gravel Pack Curve

Sieve Sieve Size Percent D30 D30 (Multiplied by 5
Depth
No. (mm) finer (%) (mm) for Gravel Pack)
16 1.18 100
30 0.60 98.59
40 0.43 87.86
410 ft 50 0.30 47.44 0.24 1.2
100 0.15 2.00
200 0.075 0.10
Then by drawing a parallel line from previous one, we found the first Gravel
Pack Material Curve.
Gravel Pack Curve

110
100
90
80
Percent Finer (%)
70
60
50
40
30 Aquifer Material
Curve
20
Gravel Pack
10 Curve
0
0.01 0.1 Particle Size (mm) 1 10
Figure 5.11: Multiplying the D30 of the grains size distribution at depth of 410’ by 5 we
get the grain size distribution curve for the Gravel Pack Material
57
From Gravel Pack Curve, we have determined Percent Finer from Gravel Pack
Material for standard sieve sizes (#4, #8, #16, #30, #40, #50, #100, and #200).
Percent Finer for Sieve No. 8 is 91%
Cumulative Percent Retained= 100-91=9%
Percent Retain for #8 = 9-0=9%
Range of Percent Retained= 9% +/- 8%= 1~17 %
From Graph, D60=1.8, D10=1.1; Uniformity Co-efficient= 1.8/1.1=2<2.5[5-7]; So
Ok
Table 5.17: Gravel Pack Material Design

Percent D30 D10
Range of D60 for Uniform
Sieve Finer from Percent for for
Sieve Cumulative Percent Gravel ity Co-
Size Gravel Retained Grave Grave
No. % Retained Retained Pack efficient
(mm) Pack (%) l Pack l Pack
(%) (mm) , Cu
Graph (mm) (mm)
4 4.75 100 0 0 0 ~ 10
8 2.36 91 9 9 1~17
16 1.18 20 80 71 63~79
30 0.6 0 100 20 12~28
1.1 0.9 1.8
2
40 0.425 0 100 0 0
50 0.3 0 100 0 0
100 0.15 0 100 0 0
200 0.075 0 100 0 0
e) Selection of Strainer Size

To retain 90% of gravel pack material,
Slot = (D10/25.4)*1000; here D10 will be of the gravel pack material
If, D10 = 0.9 mm
= (0.9/25.4)*1000=35.43
58
So, we select 6 inch diameter 40 slot strainer having each opening area of
40/1000 inch.
4 inch [5-8] diameter envelop of gravel pack material will surround the entire
screen.
Strainer Size: 40 slot

4 inch Diameter Envelop of Gravel Pack
Material
f) Calculation of Yield of Tube well

For 40 slot size, 20% (Table 5.4) opening has been assumed for steel
screening).
For 40 slot strainer,
Strainer area= 20% of strainer surface area
= 0.20 x 3.1416 x Diameter x Strainer length
Here, Diameter = 6”, Length = 100’
Assume, Flow velocity = 0.10 fps
Factor of safety = 2.5
So, Yield of a well = (0.2 x 3.1416 x 6/12 x 100 x 0.1) / 2.5[5-9]
= 3.146/2.5 ft3/s
= 1.26x (0.3048)3x3600x1000 lph
= 128103 lph
The bore log is shown in Figure 5.12 and

well log is shown in Figure 5.13
59
Table 5.18: Well Number Calculation

Zones/Demand (lpd) Present After 10 years After 20 years
Industrial 987756 1370124 1900332
Administrative 61803 74088 86562
Common Services[1] 47940 52410 56880
Fire Service 15012 15012 15012
Total Demand (lpd) 1112511 1511634 2058786
1 0.96 0.98 1.00

Well needed
1 1 1
Pumping Hour 9 12 16
Residential 888865 1030548 1192476
Common Services[2] 390660 429930 469200
Fire Service 15012 15012 15012
Total Demand (lpd) 1274537 1475490 1656688
2
0.99 0.96 0.99
Well needed
1 1 1
Pumping Hour 10 12 13
Pump 1 is for zone 1, Pump 2 is for zone 2
Yield of well = 128103 lph
The pump locations are shown in layout in Figure 5.14
N.B.: 1. Common Service for Zone 1 included Hospital, Canteen, Fire Station,
Power station, ETP, Shop.
2. Common Service for Zone 2 included School, Mosque, Bank, Park,
Canteen, Shop.
Limitation of the Study

Here we have selected pumping hour randomly. For different zone and different
time range pumping hour was different. Pumping hour in a zone may depend on
the water level on that area. Heavy Extraction may lower down water level.
60
CE - 432
Scale:
0' 50' 100'
Vertical
0' 6'' 12"
Horizontal
280'
Medium to Fine Sand

375' Well Pipe
410'
40 slot 6" Strainer 100'
475'
Medium to Fine Sand 485' Blank pipe
Well Log
560'
Medium to Fine Sand
Medium Sand 600'
610'
Medium to Coarse Sand
640'
Medium to Fine Sand
690'
Medium to Coarse Sand
720'
61
C- 5: Water Well Design and Pumping Station Visit
Bore Log
Figure 5.12: Bore log and Well log

Scale:
0' 50' 100'
Vertical
0' 6'' 12"
Horizontal
18" Housing Pipe
Static Water Level

275'
40 slot 6" Strainer (100')
340'
360'
375'
4" gravel pack
475'
485'
610'
Figure 5.13: Well log details
62
North
Figure 5.14: Position of Pumps in layout

River
1250 m
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
dorm. employee
Guard and
Substation
Guard
Pump 1 Dying
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd and
Future
Spinning
Pump 2
Playground Sample &
Storage
800 m
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. Knitting
and Park
Manufacturing
Weaving
Super
Guard Shop

Parking
Building Office
Parking
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
future
and
C- 5: Water Well Design and Pumping Station Visit
63
ATM Guard
Highway
Report on Pumping Station Visit
Existing Pumping Stations in BUET:

Pumping system is facing a major problem now a days due to over-extraction of
water from ground level. As the water table is going down, high depth boring
and high capacity pump will be needed and along with this, a huge amount of
cost may be addressed. Lower Water Table results bad quality of water
pertaining color problem, odor problem and gets mixed up with silt-clay mixture
and metals.
 Ground Water Table in BUET:

Ground Water Table in BUET was only 40-50 ft in 1979 but now it has
lower down to 275 ft.
 Pumping Water Table in BUET: 300 ft
 Average Rate of Water Table Declination (per year): 4 ft.
 Type of Pump used in BUET: Submersible Pump
Location of the Pumping Station in BUET:

Four pumping stations are currently present in BUET. In between them, two
pumping stations are currently active and others two are now under
construction (Boring process is running).
Currently active pumping stations are:
 West Palashi Pumping Station
 Nazrul Islam Hall Pumping Station
Under Construction pumping stations are:
 Pumping Station near DSW Office
 Azad Quarter near BUET playground
Features of the Active Pumping Station in BUET:

The main purpose of this study was to be familiar with different parts
of a well such as housing pipe, strainer etc.
 West Palashi Pumping Station:
Approximate number of population covered by this facility:
Around 10000
Location covered by this facility: West Palashi Campus, Main
Campus, Teacher’s quarter, DSW office etc.
Boring Depth: 480 ft.
64
Figure 5.15: Ampere and Voltmeter (West Palashi Pumping Station)
Lifting Capacity: More than 1.5-2 cusec

Lifting Height: It can lift 6 storey’s high from reservoir tank. Extra pump has
been used for 12 storey high ECE building.
Pump Capacity: 125 HP
Pump Operating hour: 17 hours (from 3:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m.
No. of Pump Operating: 2 pumps are operating continuously for 17 hour
and 1 pump is continuing 24 hour for Boring purpose.
Figure 5.16: Motor Starter and Electric Cable

(West Palashi Pumping Station)
65
Selection of Water Bearing Table:

Test Boring is done for this purpose by using 1.5 inch diameter pipe. Sample
is collected at a depth 10 feet consecutively. After analyzing boring test
results, water bearing table has been selected.
Housing Pipe:
 Diameter of Housing Pipe: 18 inch
 Depth of Housing Pipe: 360 ft.
 Comment: The 18 inch housing pipe is used for housing the pump at a great
depth, and some type of supports can be adapted from the foundation to
brackets on the pump housing to support the weight of the pipes, ejector or jet in
the well.
Strainer:
 Diameter of Strainer: 6 in
 Depth of Strainer: 80 ft.
 Comment: Strainer is used to bring water from its surrounding area which is
free from stone; in this case, it is act as a filter. There is 4 strainer with 20 ft
length of each strainer.
Suction Pipe:
 Diameter of Suction Pipe: 6 inch
 Depth of Suction Pipe: 250 ft.
6 inch
diameter
Figure 5.17: 6 inch diameter Suction Pipe (West Palashi Pumping Station)
 Comment: The total depth for suction is 250 ft comprising 25 suction pipe
with 10 ft length of each suction pipe. Water is uplifted by using this suction
pipe and store in a reservoir tank and then it supply to the building after
disinfection.
Blank Pipe:
 Depth of Blank Pipe: 40 ft.
 Comment: Blank pipe is placed at the bottom of the strainer to trap particles
that may enter into the pipe through upward converging flow. The indicating
66
40 ft length doesn’t represent a continuous length of a pipe. Rather than, a

scatter variation can be found below the ground. Around 10/15 ft length of
pipe can be provide where soil property is not adaptable.
Motor:
 Depth of Motor: 10 ft.
 Motor Height: 6ft
 Connection Length: 4ft
 Comment: It is placed below the suction pipe.
Water pressure:
 Maximum Water Pressure Before Being Turned Off: 75 psi
 Comment: At the beginning of the start of the motor, water pressure rise to
0to 40 psi within 5 min. Then gradually it attains 75 psi.
Figure 5.18: Water Pressure Indicator (West Palashi Pumping Station)
Non-return Valve:
It is used for controlling water flow in the suction pipe so that back water
flow can be prevented.
Non return Valve
Figure 5.19: Non Return Valve (West Palashi Pumping Station)
67
Disinfection: Chlorinator present at every pump.

 Amount of Chlorine: Chlorine level applied at 0.2 kg/hour or 10 Cl2 – PPD
Figure 5.20: Disinfection and Water Supply Lines (West Palashi Pumping
Station)
 Chlorine Pump Specifications:
Power: 2.2 kW, Revolutions: 2900 rpm, Capacity: 8m3/hr., Head: 45 ft.
Current Condition for Existing Defective Pump: The defective or faulty

pump which are not usable in current water table depth, are left in their position.
They weren’t removed in any means.
 Nazrul Islam Hall Pumping Station:

Boring Depth: 480 ft.
Pump Capacity: 63 K.W.
Pump Lifting Capacity: More than 1.5 cusec
Lifting Height: It can lift up to 6 storeys high building from reservoir tank.
Pumping Operating Hour:
Winter Pumping: 12-14 hr.
Summer Pumping: 16-18 hr
Housing Pipe:
 Diameter of Housing Pipe: 18 inch
 Depth of Housing Pipe: 300 ft.
 Comment: The housing pipe is used as the same reason for West Palashi
Pumping Station. Some sorts of supports can be adopted to brackets on the
pump housing to support the weight of the pipes, ejector or jet in the well.
Strainer:
 Diameter of Strainer: 6 inch
 Depth of Strainer: 90 ft.
68
Suction Pipe:
 Diameter of Suction Pipe: 6 inch
 Depth of Suction Pipe: 230 ft.
 Comment: This total 230 ft. depth comprising of 23 suction pipe with 10 ft
depth of each.
Non Return Valve
Electric Cable
Figure 5.21: Suction Pipe (Nazrul Hall Pumping Station)
Location of Motor: Below 170 ft.
Water Pressure:
 Maximum Water Pressure Before Being Turned Off: 70 psi
 Comment: At the beginning of the start of the motor, water pressure rise to 0
to 20 psi and then attains 70 psi.
Non return Valve: Resist Back Water Flow.
Disinfection: Chlorinator present at every pump.
Amount of Chlorine: Chlorine level applied at 0.1 kg/hour or 10 Cl2 – PPD
69
Figure 5.22: Chlorinator Cylinder (Nazrul Hall Pumping Station)
Chlorine Pump Specifications:

Power: 2.2 kW, Revolutions: 2900 rpm, Capacity: 8m3/hr., Head: 45
70
Summary:
From the above study, we have seen total 2 pump installation is necessary in two
zones which meet demands for 20 years. This may result water table declination at
an accountable rate.
The above scenario represent current pumping situation and its salient components
to meet water demand of BUET daily. From comparing the water depth from 1979
to 2016, it can be concluded that if water table declines at this rate, existing
pumping station may become inoperative.
Existing pumping station can be used to meet water demand for 5 to 6 years. It
can be said that when water table will go down more than 60 ft from existing
condition, water can’t be uplifted by using existing pumping stations.
Installation of extra pumps can adopt to address the situation but it will be cost
enough along with this, it’s uncertainty in design life least applied for a
sustainable solution.
High depth boring (approximately 2018 ft depth) may be a solution for
addressing future condition but it may not be economic enough and water
quality at this higher depth is very poor.
Existing defective pumps should be removed and in their place new pumps can be
installed.
Lastly, lessening the dependency of ground water can be a sustainable solution if
people can habituate to switch other forms of water.
71
CHAPTER 6
DETERMINATION OF PUMP
CAPACITY AND PUMPING
SCHEDULE
CE - 432 C- 6: Pump Capacity
Objective
Pump is a primary unit of water distribution system. Pump and pumping
machineries lift water from the source to overhead tank so that water can flow
by gravity to the distribution system. Water supply system includes: Pumps
and necessary equipment, Storage reservoirs, various pipes that convey
water to the consumers.
Scope of the study

Pumping Device is designed for supplying water to an area for a particular
range of time or continuously. As ground water is going to be extracted for
supplying water, pump has to be used and have to be given it proper head,
setting in proper position and determining accurate horse power.
a) Determining pump capacity
 Working Horse Power
 Breaking Horse Power &
b) Pumping Schedule
Terminology Used in Pumping

Before designing pumping device some terminology have to be known. These
are described in a whole in below:
Head
Hydraulic energy expressed as height of column of liquid above a datum. Minor
losses, Kinetic Energy or Velocity Head are expressed as Potential Energy or
Static Head.
hm = (kV2)/2g +hv
Hstat = HD+Hs (for lift suction head)
Hstat = HD-Hs (for flooded suction)
73
a) Flooded Suction Head b) Lift Suction Head
Figure 6.1: Definition sketches for determination of pump total static

head
Total Dynamic Head (TDH)
Total dynamic head is the total energy barrier that must be overcome before the
water can be lifted by a pump. The TDH for a pump is the net energy imposed
into the water by the pump.
TDH= (Discharge Energy- Suction Energy)
TDH= Hstat + hf + hm
Capacity
It is the volumetric flow of a liquid through a pump. The capacity of a pump is
dependent on the total TDH and pump characteristics.
The relationship between TDH and pump capacity is shown in a Pump
Characteristics Curve.
74
Figure 6.2: Pump Characteristics Curve

Power and Efficiency
The Output Power is the power produced by the pump and is often referred to
as Water Power. The Input Power is the power applied by a driver and always
exceeds the Output Power. This is also called Break Power or Break Horse
Power.
Pw = K’Q(TDH)ɤ
Ep = Pw/Pp x 100
Pw = Output Power (water power) of the pump, kW (HP)
K’ = Constant depending on the units of expression
Ep = Pump Efficiency, Usually 70-90%
Pp = Power input to the pump
Pumps Commonly Used in Water Works

Kinetic
 Centrifugal
 Peripheral or Recessed Impeller
75
Figure 6.3: Centrifugal Pump

Positive Displacement:
Figure 6.4: Piston Pump Figure 6.5: Diaphragm Pump
Figure 6.6: Screw Pump Figure 6.7: Airlift Pump
Figure 6.8: Rotary Pump
76
We are using submersible pump here because of:
i) Greater boring depth can be ensured by using submersible pump and bends in
the boring don’t cause complete failure of the operation.
ii) No shaft are used in submersible pump and motor can be placed below the
water.
DETERMINING PUMP CAPACITY

Methodology
a. For the determination of pumping capacity, the whole plan is
divided into two zones. Zone 1 consists of Industrial,
Administrative, Common Service (Hospital, Canteen, Fire
Station, Power station, ETP, Shop), Fire service and Zone 2
consists of Residential zone, Common Service (School,
Mosque, Bank, Park, Canteen, and Shop), Fire Services. Pump
Capacity for these two zones are measured separately.
b. From the yield of well and water demand we have already calculated well
number for two zones.
For Zone 1, number of well at present, after 10 years & 20 years =1
For Zone 2, number of well at present, after 10 years & 20 years = 1
c. Determination of the capacity of each pump
Steps
To determine the capacity of each pump, the following steps has been followed:
 Total Head/ Total Lift of Pump:
Total Head is the summation of Static Head, Velocity Head, and
Friction Head
Total Head = Static Head + Velocity Head + Friction Head [6-1]

Static head= Suction Head (hs) + Delivery Head (hd)[6-2]
Suction Head (hs) =0 (for submersible pump) [6-3]
Delivery Head (hd) = Static Water Level + Maximum Building Height [6-4]

Velocity Head = V2/ 2g[6-5]
Assume, Velocity of water supply = 3 fps
 Friction head
a) Friction loss is assumed to be 10% of maximum pipe length [6-6]
b) Maximum pipe length =Maximum horizontal distance + Maximum
height of the building + Height of rooftop tank [6-7]
Total Head, H = hs+ hd + hv + hf
77
 Pump Capacity
 Working Horse Power,
WHP= HQ/3960 [6-8]
Where, H= Total head or lift of the pump (ft), Q= Yield of well
(gpm)
 Breaking Horse Power,
BHP= WHP/ɳ [6-9]
Where, ɳ= Pump Efficiency = 75%
Data Analysis and Calculation:

a) Determining Pump Capacity:
Delivery head:
hd = Static water level + Maximum building height
=275 +60
=335 ft
Velocity head:
hv = v2/ 2g (Assuming, Velocity of water supply = 3 fps)
2
= 3 / (2*32)
= 0.14 ft
Friction head:
For pump 1:
Friction loss is assumed to be 10% of maximum pipe length
Maximum pipe length = Maximum horizontal distance +Maximum height of the

building + Height of overhead tank
= 1930 + 60 +10 = 2000 ft
Friction Head= maximum pipe length* 10%
= 2000 *0.1
= 200
So, Total head, H = static head+ velocity head+ friction head
= 335+ 0.14 + 200
= 535 ft
Yield of well, Q = 128103 lph
78
= 128103 / 227.13
= 564 gpm
WHP= HQ/3960
= (535*564)/3960
= 76 HP
BHP= WHP/ ɳ
= 76/0.75
= 101 HP
Similarly,
For Pump 2:
Friction loss is assumed to be 10% of maximum pipe length
Maximum pipe length = Maximum horizontal distance +Maximum height of the
building + Height of overhead tank
= 2130 + 60 +10 = 2200 ft
Friction Head= maximum pipe length* 10%
= 2200 *0.1
= 220
So, Total head, H = static head+ velocity head+ friction head
= 335+ 0.14 + 220
= 555 ft
Yield of well, Q = 128103 lph
= 128103 / 227.13
= 564 gpm
WHP= HQ/3960
= (555*564)/3960
= 79 HP
BHP= WHP/ ɳ
= 79/0.75
= 105 HP
79
For Pump 1,
Working Horse Power=76 HP
Breaking Horse Power=101 HP
For Pump 2,
Working Horse Power= 79 HP
Breaking Horse Power = 105 HP
80
CE - 432 C- 6: Pumping Schedule
DETERMINING PUMPING SCHEDULE

Methodology
a) The total present and future water demand for each zone is calculated in
Chapter 4.
b) Pumping Charts is prepared according to this demand and pumping hour.
c) In every pumping schedule, fire demand adequacy has been ensured.
Method of Supply
1. Continuous supply
2. Intermittent supply
Continuous supply is always better because

 In intermittent supply, during non-supply hours distribution lines may
suffer partial vacuum, sucking in contaminated water from nearby sewer
pipes running close to water distribution lines.
 Consumption is well metered in continuous supply
 Constant supply for firefighting can be maintained
Method of Distribution:
 System with direct pumping
o Power failure means collapse of system
o Difficult to maintain required pressure in the line under varying
rate of consumption
 System with pumping and storage

o Economic operation but high initial cost
o Required pressure can be maintained in the line under varying
water consumption
Here we have followed System with Pumping and Storage for Distribution
purpose.
81
Table 6.1 :Pumping schedule for present demand in Zone 1 Figure 6.9 :Water Demand per hour in Zone 1
Water Total Supply (Present)
Time Storage (in
Demand (in (from pump 1) Remarks 70
Schedule 1000 litre)
1000 litre) (in 1000 litre) Average Demand
CE - 432
46.375 * 10^3
54 60 litre/hour
6AM-7AM 39 128 143 OK, Pump 1 is on
8AM-9AM 55 0 175 OK, No pumping req. 50
9AM-10AM 59 0 116 OK, No pumping req.
10AM-11AM 60 128 184 OK, Pump 1 is on
40
11AM-12PM 66 128 246 OK, Pump 1 is on
12PM-1PM 58 0 188 OK, No pumping req.
1PM-2PM 57 0 131 OK, No pumping req. 30
3PM-4PM 64 128 140 OK, Pump 1 is on
Demand in 1000 litre

4PM-5PM 60 128 208 OK, Pump 1 is on 20
10
9PM-10PM 55 128 167 OK, Pump 1 is on
0
10PM-11PM 51 128 244 OK, Pump 1 is on
11PM-12AM 55 0 189 OK, No pumping req.
1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM

12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM
9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM
10PM-11PM
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

2AM-3AM 15 0 129 OK, No pumping req. Time Schedule
Total 1113 1152
82
C- 6: Pumping Schedule
Table 6.2 :Pumping Schedule for Demand after 10 years in Zone 1 Figure 6.10 :Water Demand per hour in Zone 1
Water Total Supply (10 years later)
Time Storage (in
CE - 432
1000 litre) (in 1000 litre)

Average Demand
68 90 63* 10^3
6AM-7AM 53 128 143 OK, Pump 1 is on litre/hour
7AM-8AM 56 128 215 OK, Pump 1 is on 80
9AM-10AM 80 128 188 OK, Pump 1 is on
70
10AM-11AM 82 128 234 OK, Pump 1 is on
11AM-12PM 90 128 272 OK, Pump 1 is on
60
2PM-3PM 75 128 169 OK, Pump 1 is on 50

4PM-5PM 82 128 256 OK, Pump 1 is on 40

6PM-7PM 82 128 223 OK, Pump 1 is on 30
20
10PM-11PM 69 128 166 OK, Pump 1 is on
10
11PM-12AM 75 128 219 OK, Pump 1 is on

1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM
12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM
9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM

10PM-11PM
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

Total 1512 1536
83
Table 6.3:Pumping Schedule for Demand after 20 years in Zone 1 Figure 6.11:Water Demand per hour in Zone 1
Time Storage (in
CE - 432
1000 litre) (in 1000 litre) Average Demand

85.8 * 10^3
87
litre/hour
6AM-7AM 72 128 143 OK, Pump 1 is on 120

8AM-9AM 102 128 221 OK, Pump 1 is on
9AM-10AM 109 128 240 OK, Pump 1 is on 100
10AM-11AM 111 128 257 OK, Pump 1 is on
11AM-12PM 122 128 263 OK, Pump 1 is on
1PM-2PM 105 128 179 OK, Pump 1 is on
2PM-3PM 102 128 205 OK, Pump 1 is on
3PM-4PM 118 128 215 OK, Pump 1 is on
60
4PM-5PM 111 128 232 OK, Pump 1 is on
5PM-6PM 105 128 255 OK, Pump 1 is on

40
7PM-8PM 120 128 152 OK, Pump 1 is on
8PM-9PM 104 128 176 OK, Pump 1 is on
9PM-10PM 102 128 202 OK, Pump 1 is on
10PM-11PM 92 128 238 OK, Pump 1 is on 20
11PM-12AM 102 128 264 OK, Pump 1 is on

1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM
12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM

9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM
10PM-11PM
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

Time Schedule
Total 2043 2048
84
Table 6.4 :Pumping schedule for present demand in Zone 2 Figure 6.12 :Water Demand per hour in Zone 2
Water Total Supply (Present)
Time Storage (in
Demand (in (from pump 2) Remarks
Schedule 1000 litre) 90
CE - 432

65 Average Demand
80
6AM-7AM 50 128 143 OK, Pump 2 is on 53.125 * 10^3
7AM-8AM 55 128 216 OK, Pump 2 is on litre/hour
8AM-9AM 71 128 273 OK, Pump 2 is on 70
9AM-10AM 77 128 324 OK, Pump 2 is on
60
11AM-12PM 58 0 191 OK, No pumping req.
40

6PM-7PM 47 128 192 OK, Pump 2 is on 30
20
9PM-10PM 67 128 258 OK, Pump 2 is on
10PM-11PM 60 128 326 OK, Pump 2 is on
11PM-12AM 57 0 269 OK, No pumping req. 10
0
1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM

12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM
9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM
10PM-11PM
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

Time Schedule
Total 1275 1280
85
Table 6.5 :Pumping Schedule for Demand after 10 years in Zone 2 Figure 6.13 :Water Demand per hour in Zone 2
Time Storage (in
CE - 432
73 Average Demand
90 61.5 * 10^3
litre/hour
80
9AM-10AM 89 128 292 OK, Pump 2 is on
11AM-12PM 67 0 138 OK, No pumping req.

12PM-1PM 73 128 193 OK, Pump 2 is on 60

40
5PM-6PM 128 261 OK, Pump 2 is on

66
30
9PM-10PM 78 128 243 OK, Pump 2 is on 20
10PM-11PM 69 128 302 OK, Pump 2 is on

11PM-12AM 66 128 364 OK, Pump 2 is on 10

1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM
12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM
9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM
4AM-5AM 0 171 OK, No pumping req.

10PM-11PM
36
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

Total 1476 1536
86
Table 6.6 :Pumping Schedule for Demand after 20 years in Zone 2 Figure 6.14:Water Demand per hour in Zone 2
Time Storage (in
CE - 432

80 Average Demand
61.5 * 10^3
litre/hour
7AM-8AM 72 128 199 OK, Pump 2 is on 100

9AM-10AM 100 128 263 OK, Pump 2 is on
80
11AM-12PM 75 128 218 OK, Pump 2 is on
12PM-1PM 82 128 264 OK, Pump 2 is on

6PM-7PM 61 0 233 OK, Pump 2 is on 40

9PM-10PM 88 128 241 OK, Pump 2 is on
20
10PM-11PM 77 128 292 OK, Pump 2 is on
11PM-12AM 74 128 346 OK, Pump 2 is on
1PM-2PM
2PM-3PM
3PM-4PM
4PM-5PM
5PM-6PM
6PM-7PM
7PM-8PM
8PM-9PM
6AM-7AM
7AM-8AM
8AM-9AM
1AM-2AM
2AM-3AM
3AM-4AM
4AM-5AM
5AM-6AM
12PM-1PM
9PM-10PM
9AM-10AM
12AM-1AM
10PM-11PM
11AM-12PM
11PM-12AM
10AM-11AM

Total 1656 1664
87
DESIGN OF STORAGE RESERVOIR

 Design of storage reservoir includes the selection of dimension and
elevation of the storage tank.
 The capacity of the storage is calculated from the Pump Schedule Chart
for different zones.
For Zone 1, Among Present, after 10 year and after 20 year time
span maximum storage capacity has been found for Present time (278000 lph)
For Zone 2, Among Present, after 10 year and after 20 year time
span maximum storage capacity has been found for after 10 year (364000 lph)
 Height/ depth of the tank is usually 10' to 15'
 Elevation of tank above Ground Level is 60 ft.
Figure 6.15: Consideration of Storage Reservoir Design
88
Data Analysis and Calculation
Storage Reservoir
Sample Calculation for Zone 1 is shown as below:
Maximum Storage Capacity Required for Zone 1= 278000 lph
Maximum Storage Capacity Required for 50% extra= 278000*1.5 lph
= 417000 lph
Height of tank = 15 ft
Area Required= [{417000*(3.28)3}/1000]/15
=980.99 ft2
Dimension of Tank = (980.99)0.5 ft
=32 ft x 32 ft
Elevation of tank above Ground Level =60 ft
Table 6.7 : Design of Storage Reservoir
Maximum
Maximum Storage Area of Elevation
Height Dimension
Zone Storage Required Tank of Tank
of Tank of Tank Note
No. Required with 50% Required Above
(ft) 2 Provided
(lph) Extra (ft ) GL (ft)
(lph)
1 O/H
Zone
278000 417000 15 980.99 32' x 32' 60 tank
1
required
1 O/H
Zone
364000 546000 15 1284.47 36' x 36' 60 tank
2
required
Pumping Device design is an important step to supply water to the industrial

village. As Industrial process is running, pumping schedule is carefully prepared
so that no water supply deficiency occurs. Each of the Pumping Device has
Breaking Horse Power above 100 hp; that means very high capacity pump is
needed. Every scheduling fulfills the fire demand adequately.
89
CHAPTER 7
DESIGN OF SUPPLY WATER
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
C- 7: Water Distribution Network
CE - 432
Objective:
The main objective of Water Distribution Systemis to deliver water to consumer
with appropriate quality, quantity and pressure. Distribution system is used to
describe collectively the facilities used to supply water from its source to the
point of usage. Another purpose of water distribution system is to supply water
at convenient point and time and reasonable cost.
The transmission of water from the source (or sources) to the various consumers
is usually done in two stages:
(1) Distribution :
This term is generally used to describe the system of bigger (or
trunk) mains, reservoirs and, in some situations, pumping systems
(2) Reticulation:
Reticulation refers to the interconnected pipe network through
which water finally reach to the consumers.
Requirements of Good Distribution System

 Water quality should not get deteriorated in the distribution pipes.
 It should be capable of supplying water at all the intended places with
sufficient pressure head.
 It should be capable of supplying the requisite amount of water during
fire fighting while maintaining acceptable pressures for normal service.
 The layout should be such that no consumer would be without water
supply, during the repair of any section of the system.
 All the distribution pipes should be preferably laid one meter away or
above the sewer lines.
 It should be fairly water-tight as to keep losses due to leakage to the
minimum.
Pressure in the distribution system

Proper water line pressure ensures enough supply for customers and for
firefighting, while protecting treated water from ingress of untreated
groundwater. Minimum pressure for domestic flow during peak demand should
be at least 30 psi. Fire hydrant should be operated at 40 psi, at least 10 psi at low
pressure condition. Maximum 100 psi pressure is acceptable in small low-lying
areas. Otherwise pressure reducing valve has to be used.
Layouts of Distribution Network

The distribution pipes are generally laid below the road pavements, and as such
their layouts generally follow the layouts of roads. There are, in general, four
different types of pipe networks; any one of which either singly or in
combinations, can be used for a particular place.
They are:
91
CE - 432
1) Branched Network - Dead End System

2) Looped network –
a. Grid Iron System
b. Ring System
c. Radial System
1. Branched/ Dead-end System

It comprises a transmission main starting from service reservoir or source and
laid along the main road with sub-mains branching off from the main along
other roads joining the main road. It is suitable for old towns and cities having
no definite pattern of roads.
Fig 7.1: Branched or dead-end system
Advantage:
Relatively cheap as length of pipe required is less.
i.
ii. Determination of discharges and pressure easier due to less
number of valves.
iii. Can be easily expanded to connect newly developed area
with the distribution system.
Disadvantage:
i. Due to many dead ends, stagnation of water occurs in pipes
which in turn promote sedimentation and water
contamination.
ii. 2. Frequent blow-off or flushing is needed to keep the
system clean.
iii. Repair work in mains and sub-mains cuts off water supply
downstream.
92
CE - 432
2. Looped Network
Looped distribution network is an improvement over the dead-end system. Here
the ends of mains and sub-mains are connected. This network is suitable for a
well-planned developed area with a definite pattern of road network.
2. (A) Grid Iron System

It is suitable for cities with rectangular layout, where the water mains and
branches are laid in rectangles.
Advantages:
1. Water is kept in good circulation due to the absence of dead
ends.
2. In the cases of a breakdown in some section, water is available
from some other direction.
3. Have good control over flow of water.
Disadvantages
1. Initial cost relatively high.
2. A large number of valves needed to control the flow.
3. Exact calculation of sizes of pipes is not possible due to
provision of valves on all branches.
Fig 7.2: (a) Grid-iron system, (b) Ring system
2.(B) Ring System

The supply main is laid all along the peripheral roads and sub mains branch out
from the mains. Thus, this system also follows the grid iron system with the
flow pattern similar in character to that of dead end system. So, determination
of the size of pipes is easy
93
CE - 432
Advantages:
In addition to the advantages of grid iron system, in ring system
water can be supplied to any point from at least two directions.
Disadvantages:
2. (C) Radial System:

The area is divided into different zones. The water is pumped into
the distribution reservoir kept in the middle of each zone and the supply pipes
are laid radially ending towards the periphery.
Advantages:
1. It gives quick service.
2. Calculation of pipe sizes is easy.
3. Presence of several reservoirs makes it easy to meet the
emergency water demand.
Disadvantages:
Presence of a number of distribution reservoirs increases the cost
of the system.
Distribution System Layout Design Procedure
Branched network
Assumptions
 A transmission main serving residential & a part of common services
zone was laid out along the main road.
 Quantity flowing in each section of the network was taken from the peak
daily demand previously calculated.
 Proper water line pressure ensures enough supply for customers and for
fire fighting. Water distribution system was designed to maintain
operating pressures within the system between 40 and 75 psi.
 Maximum 100 psi pressure is acceptable in small low-lying areas.
Otherwise pressure reducing valve has to be used.
 Velocity (v) assumed here to be around 3 fps to calculate pipe size.
94
CE - 432
Steps for designing branched network

1. The areas of the zone 2 (residential and 55% of common services) and
the branched networks provided in different residential and common
services were shown in the layout.
2. Then the estimated peak flows at different points were found from the
water demand calculation and then flow through each section of the
network was found.
3. Pipe size for each section was found using the equation Q= Av.
Velocity (v) was assumed to be 1m/s or 3 fps.
4. The frictional head loss was found by using the equation,
Head loss, hf = 4fLv2/2gD, where,
f = friction factor,
L = Length of pipe
v = velocity = 3 fps,
g = acceleration of gravity = 32.2 fps2
D = Diameter provided
So, pressure loss in psi = hf (ft) x 62.4 (lb/ft3) /144
5. Then pressure requirement at the furthest point from the source was
checked. Then the terminal pressure head taking the change in the
elevation of the pipe into account was determined.
6. In case of a difference between the calculated terminal pressure and
the permissible pressure head we revised the pipe size.
Sample Calculation
Sample Calculation of Pipe Section 3-4 (Mainly 4th class Residents)

From (Table 4.1: Residential Water Demand Calculation), can find the water
to be supplied to the corresponding path 3-4 are,
Peak Present Demand for 4th class residents (apartment) = 281466 lpd
Peak Present Demand for 4th class residents (dormitories) = 46294 lpd
So, along the path 3-4 water to be supplied will be the summation of the above
two numerical values.
Water Supply along Path 3-4 = 281466 +46294 lpd
= 327760 lpd
95
CE - 432
Determination of Pipe Diameter

Supply: 0.134 cusec
Length: 328 ft
Area of the pipe: Q = AV, where Q = Supply (cusec)
A = area of the pipe
V = Velocity = 3 fps
A = Q/V = (.134/3)*144 = 6.43 sq. in
= /4 =>Dreq= 2.86 in
Dprovided = 3 in (initially),
After Trial and error 5 in diameter pipe has been provided finally.
Calculation for Frictional head loss
For Path 1-2-3-4,

Head loss, hf = 4fLv2/2gD, where f = friction factor,
L = Length of pipe
v = velocity = 3 fps,
g = acceleration of gravity = 32.2 fps2
D = Diameter provided
For 1-2, hf = 11.84ft, =>Head loss in psi = hf* 62.4/144 = 5.13 psi
Total head loss in this path = 9.55 psi
Available pressure = (50-9.55) psi = 40.45 psi > 40 psi
So, OK.
96
Table 7.1: Branch Network Design
CE - 432
Loss
Area
Supply
Length
pressure
Available
Minimum
required
required
Pressure
provided
Diameter
Diameter
Head Loss
Head Loss
Comments
Path number
lpd ft³/sec inch² inch inch ft ft psi psi psi
3-4 4th class residents 327760 0.134 6.43 2.86 5 328 4.37 1.90 9.55
3-5 School, Canteen 276000 0.113 5.41 2.62 5 131 1.75 0.76 8.42
2-3 Combined 3-4. 3-5 603760 0.247 11.84 3.88 6 525 5.83 2.53 7.66 40.45
2-6 Parking, Bank 36600 0.015 0.72 0.96 5 574 7.65 3.32 8.45
1-2 Combined 2-3, 2-6 639350 0.261 12.53 3.99 6 1066 11.84 5.13 5.13
8-9 3rd class residents 344292 0.141 6.75 2.93 3 131 2.92 1.26 6.00
8-10 2nd class residents 131063 0.054 2.57 1.81 3 328 7.29 3.16 7.90
7-8 Combined 8-9, 8-10 475355 0.194 9.32 3.44 4 492 8.20 3.55 4.74
11-13 Mosque, Canteen, Playground 27120 0.011 0.53 0.82 3 328 7.29 3.16 6.71 42.10
11-12 1st class residents 127670 0.052 2.50 1.79 3 196.8 4.37 1.90 5.45
7-11 combined 11-13, 11-12 154790 0.063 3.03 1.97 4 328 5.47 2.37 3.55
1-7 combined 7-8, 7-11 630145 0.257 12.35 3.97 4 164 2.73 1.18 1.18
97
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
class Park
class class 1st class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. employee
quarter quarter quarter
Guard
197',Ø3"
10 328',Ø3" 12
8 492',Ø4" 328',Ø4" 11
9 131',Ø3" 7 328',Ø3" 13
164',
Ø4"
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd 1
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
Pump 2
dorm. quarter quarter
1066',
Ø6"
Playground
4th 4th 4th
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. quarter quarter
4 328',
Ø5" 3 525',Ø6" 2 574',Ø5"
131',Ø5" 6
5 Guard
Canteen Garden
Parking
Resthouse
School Bank
Garden Guard and
ATM
Figure 7.3: Branch Network
98
CE - 432
Looped Network
Assumptions
 A loop network is used for whole industrial unit.
 Grid-Iron system was used for supplying water in loop.
 In the looped network following conditions were satisfied:

1. Flow entering into a junction must equal the flow leaving it.
2. Algebraic sum of head loss in a closed loop will be zero.
 Hardy Cross method of approximation was used to calculate flow of
water in each pipe section.
 For the calculation of head loss, we have used HAZEN WILLIAMS
EQUATION.
Hardy Cross Method Approximations

In any looped network following two conditions must be satisfied:
The Hazen-William equation for hardy cross method is H = kQx
Where,
H = Head loss
k = is a constant depending on length, diameter and roughness ofthe pipe as
well as fluid property. Here, we are assuming k = 1
Q = Assumed flow in the pipe
X = 1.85 for Hazen-Williams equation
Steps for designing looped network

1. Reasonable rates of flow were assumed in each pipe of the network such
that inflow equals outflow at each junction.
2. In each loop the head loss, H and the H/Q ratio were found for all pipes.
3. With due attention to sign, ∑H was found around each circuit.
4. For the same circuit, ∑H/Q was found without considering sign.
5. Correction Δ was applied to each loop where Δ= - ∑H/x ∑(H/Q)
6. When the sign of Δ is negative, we decreased the clockwise flow and
increased the counter clockwise flow. When the sign is positive '+'
increase clockwise flows and decrease counterclockwise flows. Pipes that
are common to two loops require double correction.
7. With adjusted flow the process was repeated for second approximation.
8. After the flow is corrected for each loop, pipe size was determined using
head loss determination diagram (Figure: 7.6). Pipe diameter and head
99
CE - 432
loss can also be calculated using nomograph for Hazen-William formula

(Figure: 7.7)
9. If roughness coefficient C = 100, the values obtained from the nomograph
can be used directly. But if C is other than 100 then the obtained values
from nomograph needs to be multiplied by the ratio of 100 to the given
value of C.
Sample Calculation
Calculation for Pipe 1-2 and Common Pipe 3-6:
Determination of In and Out Flow for the Total network:
At out-flow node 2, the total outflow consists of water supply from the
contribution area of Hospital, Fire, ETP, Power Station.
For Hospital, Water Supply = 38718 lpd
For Fire Service, Water Supply = 4588.8 lpd
For ETP , Water Supply = 8604 lpd
For Power Station, Water Supply = 6458 lpd
Total Water Out-Flow at Node 2 = 58364 lpd
= 2432 lph = 0.68 m3/s
Similarly, Out-Flow at Node 3, 4, 5 are 14.31,9,1.03 m3/s
Now The In-Flow at Node 1 is the summation of out-flow at this 4 node.
In-Flow at Node 1 = 0.68 + 14.31 +9 +1.03 = 25 m3/s
The following Table shows the overall information of in-out flow at each node
is presented below:
Table 7.2 : Determination of Inflow and Outflow at Each Nodes

Water Supply at Water Inflow-Outflow at each
Inflow and
Distributed Area Distributed Area Node
Outflow Nodes
lpd lpd lph lps
Hospital 38718
fire 4588.8
2 58364 2432 0.68
ETP 8604
Power station 6453
Dying
3 Washing 1236167 1236167 51507 14.31
Spinning
Weaving
Sample 727203
Manufacturing
4 776733 32364 8.99
Parking 3212.16
Super shop 35133
Canteen 11185.2
5 Administrative 88621.2 88621 3693 1.03
1 Total In-Flow 2159885 2159885 89995 25.00
100
CE - 432
The Inflow-Outflow at each node is represented in the following figure showed

as:
1 2
25 lps 0.7 lps
6 3
14.3 lps
5 4
1 lps
9 lps
Figure 7.4: Inflow and Outflow at different Nodes
After determining each flow at every nodes, flow has been assigned in every
path randomly and trial has been done.
Trial 1:
Pipe 3-6:
Pipe Length 335 m
K=1
Flow for loop 1, Q0 = -20 lps = -0.02 m3/s
Head loss for pipe 3-6, H0= -1*(0.02)1.85 m = -0.0007 m
Absolute H0 = 0.0007 m
Ratio of H0/Q0 for pipe 3-6 = 0.036
As this pipe is common we have to consider both the loops.
Pipe 1-2: Length =335 m

Assumed Q0 = 7 lps. (As flow of direction is clockwise)
= 0.007 m3/s
Head loss, H0 = KQx
Here, K= is a constant depending on length, diameter and roughness of the pipe
as well as fluid property. Here, we are assuming k=1.
Q= Assumed Flow in the pipe
x= 1.85 for Hazen-Williams Equation
Head loss for Pipe 1-2 = 1 *(0.007)1.85= 0.000103 m
H0/Q0 = 0.0147
101
CE - 432
Similarly, Values of H0 for Pipe 1-2, 2-3 and 1-6 were found
Now, Summation of H0 = -0.0011 m
Similarly, values for H0/Q0 for pipe 1-2, 2-3, 1-6 were found.
Now summation of H0/Q0 = 0.097
Now, for loop 1, Δ1 = - ∑H0/x ∑ (H0/Q0) = 0.0063 m3/s
When the sign is positive '+' increases clockwise flows and decrease
counterclockwise flows.
So now Corrected flow for Pipe 1-2=0.007 + 0.0063 = 0.0133 m3/s
Corrected flows for other Pipe path is calculated as similar and shown in
the table attached (Table 7.3)
For Loop 2:
Flow for Pipe 3-6, Q0 = 20 lps = 0.02 m3/s
Head Loss for Pipe 3-6, H0 = 0.0007 m
Similarly, Values of H0 for Pipe 3-4, 4-5 and 5-6 were found
Now, Summation of H0 = 0.001 m
Ratio of H0/Q0 for pipe 3-6 = 0.036
Similarly, values for H0/Q0 for pipe 3-4, 4-5, 5-6 were found.
Now summation of H0/Q0 = 0.0715
Now, for loop 2, Δ2 = - ∑H0/x ∑ (H0/Q0) = -0.008 m3/s
So, For Pipe 3-6 corrected Q in loop 2 = Q0+ Δ2 – Δ1
= 0.02-0.008-0.0063 = 0.006 m3/s
= 6 lps
Final Corrected flows for other pipe path is shown in the table attached (Table
7.3)
Trial 2:Same procedure was repeated. As the correction ∆ value was found to
be close to zero (shown in table), it can be said that desired accuracy was
attained after Trial 2.
11 .386 lps
1 2
25 lps 0.7 lps
13.614 lps 10.686 lps
6 3
7.907 lps 14.
5.707 lps 10.15 lps
4.293 lps3 lps
5 4
1 lps 9 lps
4.707 lps
Figure 7.5: Final Flow in Every pipe
102
CE - 432
Diameter or Size Selection:

After we got the corrected Q0 we determined pipe diameter from head loss
determination diagram and obtained value from graph was multiplied by 1.2 as
the roughness coefficient value is equal to 120 for this graph.
Figure 7.6: Head Loss Determination Curve (For Roughness Coefficient C =

120)
103
CE - 432
Figure 7.7: Nomograph for Hazen-William Equation (For C = 100)
104
CE - 432
Table 7.3: Design of Loop Network (Trial 1)
Trial Length Qo Qo Abs Qo Abs Ho Δ Corrected Corrected

Pipe k Ho (m) Ho/Qo
1 (m) (lps) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) Qo (m3/s) Qo (lps)
1-2 335 1 7 0.007 0.007 0.0001 0.0001 0.0147 0.0063 0.0133 13.26
Loop 2-3 170 1 6.3 0.0063 0.0063 8E-05 0.0001 0.0135 0.0063 0.0126 12.56
1 3-6 335 1 -20 -0.02 0.02 0.0007 0.0007 0.036 0.0063 -0.0060 -5.95
6-1 170 1 -18 -0.018 0.018 0.0006 0.0006 0.0329 0.0063 -0.0117 -11.74
Sum 0.0011 0.097
Trial Length Qo Qo Abs Qo Abs Ho Δ Corrected Corrected

Pipe k Ho (m) Ho/Qo
1 (m) (lps) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) Qo (m3/s) Qo (lps)
6-3 335 1 20 0.02 0.02 0.0007 0.0007 0.036 -0.008 0.0060 5.9545
Loop 3-4 165 1 12 0.012 0.012 0.0003 0.0003 0.0233 -0.008 0.0042 4.2105
2 4-5 335 1 3 0.003 0.003 2E-05 0.0000 0.0072 -0.008 -0.0048 -4.789
5-6 165 1 2 0.002 0.002 1E-05 0.0000 0.0051 -0.008 -0.0058 -5.789
Sum 0.0010 0.0715
105
CE - 432
Table 7.3 (contd.): Design of Loop Network (Trial 2)
Pipe
Trial Length Qo Qo Abs Qo Abs Ho Δ Corrected Corrected H/L
Pipe k Ho (m) Ho/Qo Dia
2 (m) (lps) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) Qo (m3/s) Qo (lps) (m/m)
(mm)
1-2 335 1 13.26 0.0133 0.0133 0.0003 0.0003 0.0254 0.0019 0.0114 11.386 1E-06 450
Loop 2-3 170 1 12.56 0.0126 0.0126 0.0003 0.0003 0.0242 0.0019 0.0107 10.686 2E-06 300
1 3-6 335 1 -5.95 0.0060 0.0060 0.0001 0.0001 0.0128 0.0019 -0.0079 -7.907 2E-07 300
6-1 170 1 11.74 0.0117 0.0117 0.0003 0.0003 0.0229 0.0019 -0.0136 -13.614 2E-06 450
Sum 0.0003 0.0853
Pipe
Trial Length Qo Qo Abs Qo Abs Ho Δ Corrected Corrected H/L
Pipe k Ho (m) Ho/Qo Dia
2 (m) (lps) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m) (m3/s) Qo (m3/s) Qo (lps) (m/m)
(mm)
6-3 335 1 5.95 0.0060 0.006 8E-05 8E-05 0.0128 8E-05 0.00791 7.907 2E-07 300
3-4 165 1 4.21 0.0042 0.0042 4E-05 4E-05 0.0096 8E-05 0.00429 4.293 2E-07 200
Loop -
2 4-5 335 1 -4.79 0.0048 5E-05 -5E-05 0.0107 8E-05 -0.0047 -4.707 2E-07 200
0.0048
-
5-6 165 1 -5.79 0.0058 7E-05 -7E-05 0.0125 8E-05 -0.0057 -5.707 4E-07 300
0.0058
Sum -7E-06 0.0456
106
CE - 432
Hospital Fire
ETP
Service Power
Station
and
Substation
335m,Ø450mm Guard
1 2
Pump 1 Dying
and
170m,Ø300mm
170m,Ø450mm
Washing
Future
Extension Future
extension
Spinning
6 3
335m,Ø300mm
Sample &
Manufacturing
Storage pattern Sec.

165m,Ø300mm
165m,Ø200mm
Knitting
Parking and Canteen Park
Weaving
5 335m,Ø200mm
4
Super
Shop
Administrative Chairman's
Building Office
Parking
Garden and
Parking
future
extension
Guard
Figure 7.8: Loop Network
107
North
River
1250 m
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
dorm. employee Scale:
quarter quarter quarter Station 0 m 50 m 100m
Guard and
Substation
10 12 Notes:
8 11 1) All the internal road width 50'
Guard
9 7 13 and Highway width 72'
1 2 2) Grid lines create block of
Pump 1 Dying
Mosque Canteen 50m * 50 m
3rd 3rd 3rd 1 and
Future
emp. emp. emp. Legends:
Extension Future
Spinning Distribution Pipe
Pump 2
6 3 Branch network
Playground Sample &
Storage feeder area
800 m
class class class Loop network
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. Knitting
feeder area
and Park
Manufacturing
Weaving
4 3 2 5 4
OH water tank
6 Super
5 Guard Shop
Garden
Fire Hydrants
Canteen Parking Administrative Chairman's
Building Office
School Garden and

Parking
Group No. 2
Resthouse
Bank Parking Student No.
and future
ATM Guard 1104006
1104032
Highway 1104073
108
1104097
1104114
Figure 7.9: Water Distribution Network 1104168
1104195
CHAPTER 8
DESIGN OF SEWER SYSTEM
CE - 432 C- 8: Sewer Network
Objective
Sewer system plays a vital role in the economic development. Sewers are must
for the drainage of waste water. In order to have an effective sewage system the
sewers should be properly designed and more care should be taken in finding the
invert levels otherwise whole design may get wrong. Sewers are designed for the
drainage of waste water coming from houses, industries, streets, runoff etc. to
protect the environment and people from serious diseases, as more than 50
diseases spread from sewage. So for a good living, the sewers should be properly
designed and the sewage should be treated properly before discharging it into the
river. An optimal design of sewer system is one which minimizes the total cost
that includes the cost of pipes, cost of manholes, and cost of laying and jointing
of pipes, which should meet certain specification in relation to discharge, velocity
etc., and any other alternative design for the same hydraulic conditions. The
smallest feasible diameter and the minimum slope, so as to lay the pipe as close
as possible to the surface are considered as optimal. Hence, a life cycle cost
analysis of the pipes of different pipe materials and diameter is to be performed
for selecting appropriate pipe material and an optimal design for a sewer network.
The basic functional elements of a conventional sewerage system includes-
a) House connections- collect wastewater from houses
b) Network of sewer systems- for collection and conveying the wastewater
c) Treatment plant- for processing the wastewater, and
d) Receiving environment (water or land) for disposal of the treated wastewater
Classification
Depending on the type of sewage carried by the conveyance system, sewage
collection can be categorized into three types-
1. Separate Sewer System: Sanitary sewage and storm waste are collected and
conveyed separately through two different systems. Storm water can be
discharged without treatment; only sanitary sewage is treated but very costly
option.
2. Combined Sewer System: Both sanitary sewage and storm water are collected
and carried together through a single set of sewers. Economical, large size
makes it easy to clean but however increases waste load in treatment plant,
difficulties in maintaining minimum flow during dry season.
3. Partially Combined or Partially Separate System: Only one set of sewers is
laid to carry sanitary sewage as well as storm water during low rainfall.
During heavy rainfall excess storm water is carried separately e.g., through
open drains to natural channels.
110
Again, based on hydraulic characteristics and purpose, sanitary wastewater

collection systems further categorized as – gravity, pressure and vacuum
system. Gravity system is most common where wastewater is transported by
gravity.
In a conventional sewerage system wastewater from house connections are
conveyed to lateral or branch sewers. Main sewers are used to convey sewage
from one or more lateral sewers to trunk sewers or to interceptor sewers.
Trunk Sewers
Trunk sewers are large sewers that are used to convey wastewater from main
sewers to treatment or other disposal facilities, or to large intercepting sewers.
In our project we will mainly design the trunk sewer.
Components of Wastewater of Industrial Village
1. Domestic (Sanitary) wastewater
2. Industrial wastewater
3. Infiltration
4. Storm water (Excluded in this project)
Conveyance capacity allowance must be made for groundwater infiltration and
unavoidable inflows. Estimation of “design flow” is important because it
ultimately determines the sizes of the sewers to be provided.
Inflow to Sanitary Sewer Systems
Inflow is basically water entering a sewer system from surface sources such as-
leaking manhole covers, directly connected roof gutters, yard and area drains,
street wash water etc.
Infiltration to Sanitary Sewer Systems
Groundwater/percolating water
in the subsurface entering a
sewer system through- defective
pipes, leaking pipe joints, cracked
manhole walls etc. Calculation of
infiltration/inflow for new
construction can be obtained
using figure 8.1 [8-1] :
Figure 8.1: Average infiltration rate
allowance to new users
111
Average Wastewater Flows

Amount of average wastewater flow from any area depends on the amount of
average water demand/consumption of that area and also on the type of that area.
e.g., for industries without internal reuse programs - approximately 85 to 95% of
water used will be returned to the sanitary sewer system.
The table 8.1 contains percentage of average water demand for different types of
area used for calculation in this project.
Table 8.1: Percentages of avg. Wastewater

in different categories
Category Wastewater %
Industrial 90
Residential 70
Commercial 70
Administrative 70
Peak wastewater flows

Components of waste water flow include:
1. Peak flows from residential, institutional and commercial zone
2. Peak discharge of industrial wastewater
3. Peak infiltration allowance (using figure 8.1)
Peak factors for industrial, institutional and commercial wastewater is given in

table 8.2 [8-2] and Peak factor for residential wastewater is obtained by
figure 8.2 [8-3]:
Table 8.2: Peak factors for different

categories
Category Peak factor
Industrial 2.1
Commercial 1.8
Figure 8.2: Peak factor for
Institutional 4 residential wastewater
112
Sanitary Sewer: Basic Design Considerations

• Wastewater flow -industrial, commercial & residential.
• Hydraulic-design equation
• Sewer pipe materials
• Minimum pipe sizes
• Minimum and maximum velocities
• Slopes and cover
• Evaluation of alternative alignments or designs
• Selection of appropriate sewer appurtenances
Hydraulic Design Equation

The Manning equation is commonly used for sewer design. Roughness co-
efficient “n” in Manning’s equation should not be less than 0.013 [8-4] for new
sewers made of PVC, Vitrified clay or concrete.
- Pipe sections should not be less than 5 feet long
- For new constructions assume first class construction with true and smooth
inside surfaces.
For our project we will use concrete sewers. So, the value of n will be 0.013.
Pipe Sizes
• We will consider minimum pipe size 8 inches (200mm). However if wastewater
volume is low pipe size at least 6 inch is allowed.
• Smallest sewers should be larger than the building sewer connections in general
use in the area.
• Most common size of building connection is 6 inches but connections of 5 and
4 inches have been used successfully in some areas.
Flow Velocities
During design two critical velocities are considered –
i) Self cleansing velocity
 It is the minimum velocity required to be attained at least once in a day to
prevent solid deposition along sewer.
 Minimum allowable velocity [8-5] is 2 ft/sec (0.6 m/sec) at one-half full or full
depth.
 If access for cleaning is difficult, the minimum velocity should be 3 ft/sec (1
m/sec) [8-5].
 The minimum allowable velocity is taken as 0.6 m/s in this project.
113
ii) Non-scouring velocity

 It is the maximum limit of velocity to prevent scouring/ damage to sewer wall
by solids in wastewater.
 Its value depends on the material used for construction.
 Maximum allowable velocity [8-6]:
- 2.5-3.0 m/sec for concrete sewer
- 3.0-3.5 m/sec for vitrified sewer
- 2.0-2.5 m/sec for brick sewer
- 3.5-4.0 m/sec for cast iron sewer
 As we design concrete sewer, the maximum allowable velocity is taken as
3 m/s in this project.
Sewer Pipe Slopes

Sewers with flat slopes may be required to avoid excessive excavation where
surface slopes are flat or the changes in elevation are small. In such cases, the
sewer sizes and slopes should be designed so that the velocity of flow will
increase progressively, or at least will be steady throughout the length of the
sewer.
The table 8.3 [8-7] shows the minimum gravity sewer pipe slopes based on
manning’s equation with a minimum velocity of 0.6 m/s. Where practicable,
steeper slopes should be used.
Table 8.3: Gravity Sewer Minimum Pipe Slopes
Size in
Slope, m/m
inch (mm)
n = 0.013 n = .0.015
8 (200) 0.0033 0.0044
10 (250) 0.0025 0.0033
12 (300) 0.0019 0.0026
15 (375) 0.0014 0.0019
18 (450) 0.0011 0.0015
21 (525) 0.0009 0.0012
24 (600) 0.0008 0.0010
27 (675) 0.0007 0.0009
30 (750) 0.0006 0.0008
36 (900) 0.0004 0.0006
114
Sewer Appurtenances
Primary appurtenances for sanitary sewers:
• Manholes
• Drop inlets to manholes
• Building connections
• Junction chambers
Manholes
The number of manholes must be adequately spaced so that the sewers can be
easily inspected and maintained.
Manhole Size and Spacing
Size [8-8]:
• Manholes in small sewers are usually about 4 feet in diameter when the sewers
have circular cross sections.
• In large sewers, larger manholes may be required to accommodate larger
cleaning devices.
Spacing [8-9]:
• Sewers < 24 in (600mm) - Place manholes at intervals not greater than 350 ft
(100m).
• Sewers 27 – 48 in (700-1200mm) - Place manholes at intervals not greater than
400 ft (120m).
• Sewers > 48 in (1200 mm) - Manholes may be placed at greater intervals
depending on local conditions like breaks in grade, location of street intersections,
etc.
In addition place manholes –
• Abrupt changes in horizontal direction or slope
• Pipe size change locations
Vertical Profile
 Prepared for trunk sewer.
 Show following items:
- Ground surface
- Tentative manhole locations
- Elevations of important subsurface strata such as rock
- Underground structures
- Basement elevations
- Cross streets
- Plan of the sewer line
 Horizontal scale of 1:1000 and vertical scale 1:100
115
Steps of Sewer System Design

A) At first we have collected the contour map for our design area. The area is
getting lowered towards the river. Then the junctions (nodes) of branch
sewers/main sewers with the Trunk sewer is marked and identified in layout. The
trunk sewer starts from the road between bank and administrative building, has a
right angle turn while passing the industrial zone and stops at ETP. The plan is
shown in Figure 8.5.
B) We have divided the plan into 6 feeder areas. The six areas are shown in
Figure 8.6. From these areas sanitary wastewater and infiltration occurs in sewer
system and its quantity increases cumulatively towards ETP.
C) We have previously calculated the supply water demand for each of these
areas. Now average wastewater is calculated by assuming that a portion of these
supply water will be returned to sanitary sewer system. The assumption table 8.1
with percentages of average wastewater in each category is given before.
D) The peak wastewater flow can be obtained by multiplying the avg.
wastewater with peak factors included in the table 8.2. The total calculation of
peak wastewater flow is given later in table 8.4.
E) The total infiltration for each area is calculated by using the figure 8.2
shown in table 8.5. Combining the peak wastewater flow and infiltration
cumulatively we get the design wastewater flow (table 8.6).
F) Now we will design the trunk sewer. At first we have to consider the slope
of pipe. Initially we will provide the natural slope of soil.
We will use n = 0.013 (for new concrete pipe)
From Manning’s equation [8-10], Pipe diameter, D (m) = 1.548*[n*Q/√S]0.375
We have to use the next larger diameter (Dactual) from table 8.3, if the calculated
diameter pipe doesn’t exist.
G) By using the above
equation with Dactual we have
to calculate Qfull. We have to
calculate Vfull using Manning’s
equation [8-11],
Vfull = 1/n*(D/4)2/3S1/2
Then by calculating Q/Qfull,
From hydraulic elements
diagram [8-12], we get d/D
and V/Vfull, and then V.
H) We have to check this
velocity against minimum
velocity(0.6 m/s) and Figure 8.3: Hydraulic Element Diagram for Circular Sewer
116
non-scouring velocity(2 m/s). If not satisfactory, then we have to give trial again
with changed slope and diameter. The pipe diameters with slope is shown in
table 8.6.
I) Now we have to draw the longitudinal pipe profile (Table 8.7). From
available contour diagram of the area, Ground surface elevation at each node
along the trunk sewer trench line is calculated. Sewer crown and invert level is
important in drawing.
Sewer crown = Ground elevation – Cover – Pipe thickness
Sewer invert = Crown – Pipe diameter
Figure 8.4: Invert and Crown level of Pipe
J) The manhole locations are determined in table 8.8. The number of

manholes must be adequately spaced so that the sewers can be easily inspected
and maintained. As our sewers are less than 600mm diameter so manhole spacing
should not be more than 100 m [8-13]
In figure 8.7 the longitudinal profile of sewer is shown with ground
surface RL, pipe plan view, crown and invert level and manhole positions.
Sample Calculation
Here we will show all calculations for the pipe 2.
Its feeder area is A2, Length 125 m.
(a)Calculation of Peak wastewater
For A2 area, average supply water demands are 44145 lpd (administrative zone),
2025 lpd (Super shop), 1500 lpd (Canteen) and 1125 lpd (Power station) (Table
8.4). The last three are common services.
117
Previously mentioned wastewater percentages of supply water is 70% for both

administrative and industrial zone. The peak factor for administrative zone
(institutional) is 4 and for common services they are 1.8.
So, Peak wastewater (without inflow),
For administrative zone = 44145*0.7*4 = 123606 lpd
For super shop = 2025*0.7*1.8 = 2552 lpd
For Canteen = 1500*0.7*1.8 = 1890 lpd
For power station = 1125*0.7*1.8 = 1418 lpd
Flow from pipe 1 =222243 lpd
Total cumulative flow = 222243+123606+2552+1418 = 351708 lpd = .004072 m3/s
For A2, total area 24.5 hectare, from graph average infiltration rate = 8.75 m3/hectare-
day and flow from pipe 1 = 113.75 m3/day
So, total cumulative infiltration = 113.75/ (24*3600) + 8.75*24.5/ (24*3600)
= 0.0038 m3/s
So, total peak wastewater rate = .0038+.0040 = 0.008 m3/s
(b)Pipe diameter calculation
From contour map (Figure 8.5),
The ground elevation at upper end = 19.4 m, at lower end = 18.7 m.
Line length = 125 m
So, natural slope = (19.4-18.7)/125 = 0.0056
Assuming a slope 0.006 for pipe laying,
From Manning’s equation, Pipe diameter, D = 1.548*[n*Q/√S]0.375
= 1.548*[0.013*.008/√0.006]0.375
= 0.129 m = 129 mm
The next larger pipe diameter (available) is 200 mm
So, using this as Dactual, Qfull = [D/1.548](1/0.375) * √S/n
= [0.200/1.548](1/0.375) * √0.006/0.013 = 0.025 m3/s
Now, Q/Qfull = 0.008/0.025 = 0.310
118
From Hydraulic element graph, for Q/Qfull = 0.31, d/D = 0.4 , V/Vfull = 0.75,
Now from Manning’s equation, Vfull = 1/n*(D/4)2/3S1/2
= 1/0.013*(0.200/4)2/30.0061/2 = 0.81 m/s
So, V = 0.81 * 0.75 = 0.61 m/s, 0.6 < V < 2, So, Pipe diameter is OK.
(c)Calculation of Longitudinal Profile
Pipe slope = 0.006, Pipe length = 125 m,
Pipe diameter = 200 mm, Pipe thickness 50 mm
Crown level of lower end of pipe 1 is 17.25 m
So, Crown level at upper end of pipe 2 = 17.25m
Invert level at upper end of pipe 2 = 17.25 - 0.2 = 17.05 m
Cover at upper end = 2.1 m
Fall in sewer = 0.006*125 = 0.75 m
GL at lower end = 18.7 m
Crown level at lower end of pipe 2 = 17.25-0.75 m = 16.50 m
Invert level at upper end of pipe 2 = 16.50 - 0.2 = 16.30 m
Cover at lower end = 18.7-16.50-0.05 = 2.15 m > 2 m (OK)
So, Pipe 2 design is ok.
119
River
1250 m
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
class class ETP
CE - 432
emp. 1st class Service

emp. emp. employee Power
dorm. quarter quarter Station
Guard quarter 16 m
and
Substation
16.5 m
Guard 17 m
17.5 m
Dying
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd and
class class class Washing 18 m
Future
dorm. quarter quarter 18.5 m
extension
Spinning
19 m
Playground Sample &
Storage
800 m
class class class
emp. emp. emp. 19.5 m
dorm. Knitting
quarter quarter Parking Canteen Park
and
Manufacturing
Weaving
Super 20 m
Guard Shop

Parking
Building Office
Parking
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
and future
ATM Guard
120
C- 8: Sewer Network
Highway Node/Flow increment point
Figure 8.5:Contour Map

River
1250 m
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
class class ETP
CE - 432
emp. 1st class Service

emp. emp. employee Power
dorm. quarter quarter Station
Guard quarter
and
Substation
A5 5 6 Guard
Dying
Mosque Canteen
3rd 3rd 3rd and
class class class
4 Washing
Future
Spinning
A6
Playground Sample &
3 Storage
800 m
class class class
emp. emp. emp. A3
dorm.
A4 Knitting
quarter quarter Parking Canteen Park
and
Manufacturing
Weaving
2
Super
Guard A2 Shop

Parking
1 Building Office
Parking
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
A1 Guard and future
Garden extension
ATM Guard
121
C- 8: Sewer Network
Highway Node/Flow increment point
Figure 8.6: Feeder Area

North
River
1250 m
CE - 432
Mosque Shop
2nd 2nd 2nd
dorm. employee Scale:
quarter quarter quarter Station 0 m 50 m 100m
Guard and
Substation
Notes:
Guard 1) All the internal road width 50'
and Highway width 72'
2) Grid lines create block of
Pump 1 Dying
Mosque Canteen 50m * 50 m
3rd 3rd 3rd and
Future
Spinning Legends:
Pump 2
Trunk sewer
Playground Sample &
Storage Manhole
800 m
class class class
emp. emp. emp.
dorm. Knitting
and Park
Manufacturing
Weaving
Super
Guard Shop

Parking Group No. 2
Building Office
Student No.
Parking 1104006
School Garden and
Resthouse
Bank Parking
and future 1104032
ATM Guard 1104073
1104097
Highway
1104114
122
C- 8: Sewer Network
1104168
1104195
Figure 8.7: Trunk Sewer and Manhole Locations in Layout Plan
CE - 432
Table 8.4: Wastewater Calculation (Excluding infiltration)

Contributing Average Average Peak
Area Wastewater Peak Cumulative Total
Line area Demand wastewater wastewater
Description percentage factor
number lpd lpd lpd lpd m³/s
School 73500 70 51450 4 205800
Canteen 1500 70 1050 1.8 1890
1 A1 222243 0.002572
Parking 4800 70 3360 1.8 6048
Bank & ATM 6750 70 4725 1.8 8505
Administrative
44145 70 30902 4 123606
zone
2 A2 Super Shop 2025 70 1418 1.8 2552 351708 0.004071
Canteen 1500 70 1050 1.8 1890
Power station 1125 70 788 1.8 1418
Weaving
3 A3 Sample 362225 90 326003 2.1 684605 1036313 0.011994
Manufacturing
3rd and 4th class
268821 70 188175 3.5 658611
residential area
4 A4 1704374 0.019727
Mosque 6000 70 4200 1.8 7560
Canteen 1500 70 1050 1.8 1890
2nd class 52425 70 36698 3.5 128441
1st class 51068 70 35748 3.5 125117
5 A5 1967445 0.022771
Fire service 800 70 560 1.8 1008
Hospital 6750 70 4725 1.8 8505
Dying
6 A6 Washing 615744 90 554169 2.1 1163755 3131201 0.036241
Spinning
123
C- 8: Sewer Network
CE - 432
Table 8.5: Calculation of Infiltration

Total
Average
Area Cumulative
Pipe Contributing infiltration rate
infiltration
no. area number
in square in
m³/hectare-day m³/day m³/sec
m. hectare
1 A1 130000 13 8.75 113.75 0.0013
2 A2 245000 24.5 8.75 328.125 0.0038
3 A3 60000 6 8.75 380.625 0.0044
4 A4 225000 22.5 8.75 577.5 0.0067
5 A5 260000 26 8.75 805 0.0093
6 A6 80000 8 8.75 875 0.0101
124
C- 8: Sewer Network
CE - 432
Table 8.6: Pipe diameter Calculation V
Vfull
Total
Q (full)
d/D
Line
Diameter
Diameter
Exact Pipe
Slope
Infiltration
Actual Pipe
V/Vfull
Wastewater
Wastewater
Q/Qfull
< v < 2 m/s)
m³/s m³/s m³/s mm mm m³/s m/s m/s

Remarks (0.6 m/s
1 0.0013 0.003 0.004 0.007 96 150 0.011 0.354 0.39 0.85 0.72 0.61 OK
2 0.0038 0.004 0.008 0.006 129 200 0.025 0.310 0.4 0.75 0.81 0.61 OK
3 0.0044 0.012 0.016 0.004 183 200 0.021 0.790 0.75 0.95 0.66 0.63 OK
4 0.0067 0.020 0.026 0.004 219 250 0.038 0.702 0.68 0.92 0.77 0.70 OK
5 0.0093 0.023 0.032 0.004 236 250 0.038 0.853 0.77 0.98 0.77 0.75 OK
6 0.0101 0.036 0.046 0.004 270 300 0.061 0.758 0.72 0.96 0.87 0.83 OK
125
C- 8: Sewer Network
CE - 432
Table 8.7: Calculation of Pipe Profile
(RL), m
(RL), m
Ground
Elevation
Elevation
Line
Sewer Invert
Slope
Length, m
Diameter, mm
Fall in Sewer, m
Invert Drop, mm
end
end
end
end
end Cover above
end
Lower
Lower
Lower the pipe, m
Upper
Upper
Upper
1 100 0.007 150 0.7 - 17.8 17.1 20 19.4 2 2.1

2 125 0.006 200 0.75 50 17.05 16.3 19.4 18.7 2.1 2.15
3 125 0.004 250 0.5 50 16.25 15.75 18.7 18.15 2.15 2.1
4 150 0.004 250 0.6 0 15.75 15.15 18.15 17.75 2.1 2.3
5 200 0.004 300 0.8 50 15.1 14.3 17.75 16.6 2.3 1.95
6 100 0.004 300 0.4 0 14.3 13.9 16.6 16.25 1.95 2
Table 8.8: Manhole Positions

Position M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11
Line 1 1-2 2 2-3 3 3-4 4 4-5 5 5-6 6
Distance from Upper end of Line, m 0 100 62.5 125 62.5 125 75 150 100 200 100
126
C- 8: Sewer Network
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M8 M9 M10 M11
CE - 432
Plan View
100 m 125 m 125 m 150 m 200 m 100 m
20m
19.4m 19.4m
18.7m
18.7m Reduced Level
18.15m 18.15m
17.95m 17.75m 17.75m
17.25m Ground Surface
17.25m
16.60m
17.8m
16.50m 16.50m 16.60m
17.10m 16.00m 16.00m 16.25m
17.05m 15.40m 15.40m
16.30m Crown Level
0.007 16.25m 14.60m 14.60m
15.75m 15.75m
Invert Level 14.20m
0.006 15.15m
15.10m
0.004 14.30m 14.30m
0.004 13.90m
Slope of Pipe
0.004
0.004
Ø150mm Ø200mm Ø250mm Ø250mm Ø300mm Ø300mm

X-section of Pipe
Ø150mm Ø200mm Ø250mm Ø250mm Ø300mm Ø300mm
Short Direction of Layout Long Direction of Layout
Scale:
0m 2m 4m
Vertical: Legends:
0m 50 m 100 m Pipe Crown
127
C- 8: Sewer Network
Horizontal: Figure 8.8: Longitudinal Profile of

Pipe Invert
Note: The pipe sections are not in scale. Trunk Sewer Manhole
They are enlarged for clearity.
CHAPTER 9
DESIGN OF PLUMBING SYSTEM
CE - 432 C-9: Plumbing System
Objective
The objective of the chapter is to design components of water supply system
and drainage system of seven storied building. For the design of water supply
system down feed water supply is considered. The design components; size of
water distribution pipes, size of underground water reservoir and overhead
water tank, riser size and pump capacity are calculated for the building. The
elements like drainage pipes, building drains and sewers, including connections,
devices and other appurtenances are designed for building drainage system.
Plumbing
The plumbing includes the practice, materials, and fixtures used in the
installation., maintenance, extension, and alteration of all piping, fixtures,
appliances, and accessories in connection with sanitary drainage or storm
drainage facilities, the venting system and the public or private water supply
systems within or adjacent to any building, structure, or conveyance.
Major Elements of plumbing system

The plumbing system includes-
 Water supply and distribution pipes: riser, up feed or down feed
distribution pipes, underground water reservoir (UGWR) and overhead
(OH) tank.
 Plumbing fixtures and traps,
 Soil, waste and vent pipes,
 Building drains and building sewers, including-their respective
connections, devices, and appurtenances within the property lines of the
premises. (It is excluded in our design)
Plumbing
System
Water Supply
Drainage
and Distribution
System
System
129
DESIGN OF WATER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Water Distribution in a Building
Water distribution in to building can be done in many way
1. Upfeed distribution
Simple upfeed
– Water fed to fixtures in a building only by the incoming pressure of the supply
water.
– This method is good for buildings up to 5 to 6 stories high.
Pumped upfeed
– Water fed to the fixtures in a building by increasing the pressure of the supply
water using additional pumps.
2. Down Feed Distribution

– Uses pumps to deliver water to a rooftop storage tank of the building.
– The water in the storage tank feeds fixtures below due to the force of gravity.
– Commonly one roof top tank is used to distribute water to whole building. For
tall building intermediate tank (s) are often used to supply water at different
levels.
– If main does not have sufficient pressure to carry water to OH tank,
underground water reservoir (UGWR) is provided to store water from main and
deliver to the overhead tank.
As the designated building is 7 storied, so we have choose Down

Feed Distribution.
Design of Down Feed Water Supply System
Design Components
1. Sizing of Water Distribution Pipes within the Building
2. Dimensions of UGWR
3. Dimensions of OH tank
4. Determination of size of riser
5. Calculation of Pump capacity
130
Design steps
A. Sizing of Water Distribution Pipes within the Building
B. Calculation of Dimension of Underground Water Reservoir
C. Calculation of Dimension of Overhead Water Tank
D. Design of Riser Pipe and Pump
E. Calculation of pump capacity
The design of the consumers’ pipes or the supply pipe to the fixtures is based
on:
a) The number and kind of fixtures installed;
b) The fixture unit flow rate; and
c) The probable simultaneous use of these fixtures.
The rates at which water is desirably drawn into different types of fixtures are
known. These rates become whole numbers of small size when they are
expressed in fixture unit. The fixture units for different sanitary appliances or
groups of appliances are given in the Table- 8.5.4 [9-1].
The design steps are described below:
1. Drawing the sketch of the main lines, risers and branches serving different
fixtures at different water use points in the building.
2. Determining the number and types of fixture that will be required on the basis
of the Table- 8.6.1[9-2] or as per design requirement.
3. The demand weight of different fixture units is computed in terms of water
supply fixture unit (wsfu) either using Table – 8.5.4 or from Table- P1 [9-3].
4. As the total down feed zone is supplied by more than one pipe, the total peak
demand is calculated for individual down feed zone using the procedure below-
5. It should be noted that the possibility of all water supply taps in any system in
domestic and commercial use will draw water at the same time are extremely
remote. Designing the water mains for the gross flow will result in bigger and
uneconomical pipe mains and is not necessary. Therefore the peak demand load
(or maximum probable flow) in liter per minute may be estimated with the data
obtained in step-3 either using
a) Fig.-P1 (Hunter curve) [9-4] or
b) From Table-8.5.5 [9-5] or
c) On the basis of occupancy classification specified in Table - 8.5.1. [9-6]
In our calculation Hunter curve is used.
131
6. The equivalent length calculation:
The length of the main lines, risers and branches from elevation & floor plan is
determined.
The equivalent length of different fittings may be estimated on the basis of the
data presented in the Table-P2 (a), Table-P2 (b) and Table-P2(c) [9-7].
The total equivalent length is the sum of the equivalent lengths of all pipes and
fittings.
7. Pressure at fixture:
In a down feed water distribution system (roof tank supply), static pressure due
to gravity increases with increasing floor height (4.32 psi or 0.3 Bar per floor of
10 ft. height at non flow condition). Therefore, water distribution pipe in a
building should be maintained at a pressure so that none of their fittings are
subject to a water head greater than 35 m (approximately 50 psi).
The distribution system should be maintained at a pressure not less than those
specified in Table- 8.5.6[9-8] during peak demand period.
Average available pressure loss (kPa) Fp = P ± 9.8H – f (+ve for down-feed

supply)
Where
Fp = Average available pressure loss (kPa) per meter of equivalent length of
pipe
P = Pressure (kPa) in the water main OR zero for overhead gravity storage tank.
H = Difference (m) in elevation between storage tank and the fixture under
consideration.
f = Pressure loss (kPa) through water meter or such other fittings plus pressure
(kPa) required to produce adequate flow through the fixture under consideration
in down-feed system.
8. Selection of pipe size:

Commercially available standard sizes of pipes are only to be used against the
sizes arrived at by actual design. Therefore, several empirical formulae are used,
even though they give less accurate results.
The Hazen and William’s formula and the charts based on the same may be
used without any risk of inaccuracy in view of the fact that the pipes normally to
be used for water supply are of smaller sizes. Nomograph of Hazen and
William’s equation has been provided in Figure-P4 [9-9].
For this using peak demand and available pressure loss determine pipe size from
Figure-P4.
132

For water supply system with inadequate pressure to feed plumbing fixtures or
balancing roof tank, the building premises usually have a ground (or
underground) tank to store water most commonly below stair case. The water
from the ground tank is then boosted up to the roof tank to feed plumbing
fixtures.
 Calculate total daily demand for the building using Table - 8.5.1 (or total
demand obtained in step-5 in determination of pipe size in topic-A)
 Water is stored in underground water reservoir with extra one day reserve
for emergency requirements.
Therefore total capacity of Under Ground Reservoir (Q) = 2 x Total daily

demand of water (m3).
 UGWR is usually provided below stair case. So the surface area of the
tank depends on the area available below stair case.
Say, the dimension is e.g., surface area, (A) = 20’ x 12’.

Water depth H1 = Q/A.
 Using a thumb rule of 10:1, i.e., a 10 story building will require 10'
foundation thus 10' depth of U/G reservoir can be provided.
This height should include height obtained in step-5 + 6” to 12” freeboard

Total height = H1 + Free board (6 -12 inch)
 Finalize the dimensions of the tank.

In addition to daily water consumption, an overhead water reservoir is used to
store water in case of emergency such as fire or power cutoff.
1. Assume reasonable pumping schedule to pump water from UGWR to the

overhead tank. e.g., if 1 hour pumping twice daily, tank volume needed
V1 = total daily demand (m3)/2.
2. For calculating of water requirement for fire -fighting, use Table 4.4.1[9-10].
Therefore, V2 = fire-fighting rate (m3/min) * 30 min.
3. Therefore capacity of the tank = V1 + V2
4. Calculate appropriate dimensions for the tank.
133
5. In addition to height obtained in step- 4 a freeboard of 10” - 12’’ should be

provided.
Note: To provide sufficient pressure, the bottom of the tank must be

elevated sufficiently above the highest floor water fixtures.

Riser pipes are used to convey water from the underground water reservoir to
overhead tank and a pump is required so that the water can flow upward through
the riser pipe.
1. Total amount of water carried by the riser each time of pumping to OH tank
(gpd) = total daily demand/ pumping frequency
Say 3000 gallon is carried by the riser each time of 1 hour pumping to OH tank
Therefore, Q = 50 gpm
2. Assume velocity 8-10 fps
3. Using Fig. - P4, determine pipe size (d) and head loss (hL) (psi/100 ft)

1. Total length of riser (L) = total building height (10 ft per floor) + 10’ from
UGWR + OH tank inlet height above top roof surface.
2. Total Frictional head HL = (hL * L)/100 + 8 psi required pressure at the O/H
tank + 5 psi minor loss due to bend
3. Frictional head in ft Lh = HL *144 /62.2
4. Total Head, H = Static head + Velocity head + Friction head
Pump capacity = HQ/ (3960 E).

Assume E = 60-65%
134
Calculation
 Calculation of water demand of a building (7 story)
From plan of the building, we see there are 2 apartments in each floor and total
14 apartments in the building. Each apartment consists of 3 toilets, 1 kitchen
and 1 dining room.
We assume the fixtures in these rooms are as:
Room Fixtures FU
Toilet Flash tank+ wash basin+ shower head 3+5+1=9
Kitchen Kitchen sink+ tap 2+1=3
Dining room Wash basin 1
[Values of FU are taken from Table 8.5.4 and Table P1]
Total FU in 1 apartment= 3 toilets + 1 kitchen + 1 dining room = 3×9+3+1=31

Total FU in the building= 14×31= 434
For 434 FU, demand = 422 L/min [Interpolating from the table 8.5.5]
=111.5 gpm
Apartment size is approximately 1260 sq. ft < 1500 sq. ft
From Table 8.5.1 (a), category b2;
Water consumption= 120 lpcd (restricted facility)
We assume, no. of family members in each apartment= 5
Now, water consumption in each apartment = 5×120 = 600 lpd
Water consumption in whole building= 600 lpd × 14 = 8400 lpd
= 2220 gpd
 Calculation of dimensions of underground water reservoir

Capacity of this reservoir will be 2×8400 lpd = 16800 lpd
= 593 cft = 600 cft
If reservoir is placed under staircase, we assume its area 15 ft*7 ft
Hence height of reservoir = (600)/ (15×7) = 5.71 ft
We provide height 6.5 ft (9.5 inch free board)
Using a thumb rule of 10:1, 7 story building will require 7' foundation thus 7'
depth of U/G reservoir can be provided.
Dimensions of the reservoir is 15 ft × 7 ft × 6.5 ft
135
 Calculation of dimensions of overhead water reservoir
We assume 1 hour pumping and twice in a day.

2220/2 = 1110 gal/ hour
1110 gal= 1110*3.785/28.317 cft = 148 cft
Considering from Table 4.4.1, building type light hazard 1 (occupancy

group A2), standpipe and hose system,
Flow requirement= 1000 liter/min
For 30 min duration,
Water volume= 30×1000= 30000 liter
=1059cft
Total volume of water required= 1059+148=1207 cft
We provide area of 20 ft× 8 ft
Hence depth= (1207)/ (20×8) = 7.54 ft
We provide depth of 8.5 ft (with approximately 12 inch free board)

Dimensions of the overhead reservoir is 20 ft × 8 ft × 8.5 ft
Overhead tank is on 25 ft above from roof.
 Design of Riser Pipe

Water flow 1110 gal/hour =18.5 gpm
Assuming velocity 10 ft/sec,
From Fig. - P4, 1.5" diameter riser is provided
The corresponding head 550 ft/1000 ft
Head loss, hL= 550*0.433 =238 psi/ 1000ft
 Design of Pump
Total length of riser (L) = total building height 70 ft+6.5 ft (from UGWR )+
OH tank inlet height above top roof surface 33 ft = 109.5 ft
Total Frictional head HL = 238/1000*109.5 psi + 8 psi (required pressure at the
O/H tank) + 5 psi (minor loss due to bend) = 39 psi
Frictional head in ft, Lh = HL ×144 /62.2 = (39×144)/62.4 = 90 ft
Velocity Head = v2/2g = 10^2/ (2×32) = 1.56 ft
Total Head, H = Static head (L) + Velocity head + Friction head (Lh)
= 109.5' + 1.56' + 90'= 201 ft
We assume pump efficiency= 60%
136
HP of the pump = HQ/ (3960 E)

201×18.52
=
3960×.6
= 1.56 HP
Hence we provide a pump of 2 HP
 Design of Down Feed Zone
Required faucet pressure at top floor = 6 psi
Maximum pressure = 50 psi

Assume 2 psi pressure loss for different fittings
Assume velocity =10 fps
Two down feed zones are selected. One will provide water to the upper 4 floors
And other will provide water to the lower 3 floors.
For 6th floor,
Fixtures Unit, FU = 62
Accumulated Fixtures Unit, FU = 62*4 = 248
From Fig.-P1, Demand flow = 74 gpm

Horizontal length of pipe = 65 ft
Vertical length of pipe = 30 ft
From Fig.-P4, pipe dia = 2 inch

Friction loss in per 100 ft = 7.5psi
Pressure loss due to friction and fittings = (7.5/100*65) +2 = 6.88 psi
Average available pressure = 0.433*30-(6.88+6) = 0.13 psi
137
DESIGN OF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Drainage System
A drainage system (drainage piping) includes all the piping within public or
private premises, which conveys sewage, rain water, or other liquid wastes to a
legal point of disposal, but does not include the mains of a public sewer system
or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plan.
Major Elements of Building Drainage System

1. Drainage pipes
• Soil pipes
• Waste pipes
• Vertical pipes are known as stacks (soil / waste / vent)
2. Traps
• Placement
• Depth of trap seal
• Cleaning
3. Vents
• Purpose - ventilate plumbing system & prevent foul gases from drainage
system to enter the building
• Vent stack size
Building Drainage Systems

For the design and installation for drainage piping, one of the following building
drainage systems can be adopted:
1. Single stack system,
2. one-pipe system, and
3. two-pipe system
Single stack system
 The fixtures in each floor are connected to a single stack without any trap
ventilation pipe work.
 Single stack system usually used with 100 mm diameter stack for
buildings up to 5-storey height.
138
Two-pipe system:
 A discharge pipe system comprising two independent discharge pipes -
one conveying soil directly to the sewer, the other separately conveys the
sullage from kitchen and bath directly to the drain through a trapped
gully.
 The system may also consist of ventilating pipes.
We will use Two-pipe system as our building is more than 5 storied.
Design Steps
1. Providing individual soil pipe, waste pipe and vent pipe for each bathroom on
each floor.
2. Providing one waste pipe and vent pipe for kitchen on each floor.
3. Calculating total DFU (drainage fixture units) using Table 14.4 [9-11] for all
fixtures connected to each soil pipe waste pipe.
4. Determine trap size using same table
5. Using Table-14.13[9-12] to determine the size of soil and waste pipe. e.g., use
3rdcolumn of the table for total DFU of multistoried building.
6. Using Table-14.12[9-13] to determine the size for vent pipe
7. Draw and show the details of drainage system
Assumptions [9-14]
1. The discharge from water closet is carried by the soil pipe.

2. The discharge from shower and wash basin is carried by waste stack pipe.
3. Vent stack height continued at least 5 feet above roof.
4. Water closet has minimum 2” vent.
5. Individual vents from any other fixture shall not be less than 1 1/4 inches
6. Connections of pipes should be at 45° angles
7. Cleanouts should be provided every 50 ft of horizontal length
8. Cleanouts also should be provided at all stack bottoms
139
Calculation Procedure
Toilet 1 and 2
DFU
From Table 14.4,
DFU for water closet =4
DFU for Shower head =2
DFU for Wash basin =3
Total DFU for water closet =DFU unit value *No. of Fixtures*No. of Storey
= 4*2*7 = 56
Total DFU for Shower head = 2*2*7 = 28
Total DFU for Wash basin = 3*2*7 = 42
Trap Size
From Table 14.4,

Water Closet= 3”
Shower head = 2”
Wash basin = 1.5”
Size of Soil and Waste Pipe and Stack
Max. Fixture units connected to soil pipe = 4
Max. Fixture units connected to waste pipe = 5
From Table 14.13,
Size of Soil pipe = 2”
Size of Waste pipe = 2”
Fixtures unit connected to soil stack = 56
Fixtures unit connected to waste stack = 28+42
= 70
From Table 14.13,
Size of Soil Stack = 4”
Size of Waste Stack = 4”
Size and Length of Vent Pipe
Size of Soil/ Waste Stack = 4”
140
Length of Vent pipe = 70+5

= 75 feet
Total Fixtures connected to soil stack =56
From Table 14.12,
Size of Soil Vent = 2.5”
Total Fixtures connected to waste stack = 70
Size of Waste Vent =2.5”
Toilet 3 and Kitchen 1
DFU
From Table 14.4,
DFU for water closet =4
DFU for Shower head =2
Total DFU for water closet =DFU unit value *No. of Fixtures*No. of Storey
= 4*1*7 =28
Total DFU for Shower head = 2*1*7 =14
Trap Size
From Table 14.4,
Water Closet= 3”
Shower head = 2”
Wash basin = 1.5”
Size of Soil and Waste Pipe and Stack
Max. Fixture units connected to soil pipe = 4
From Table 14.13,
Size of Soil pipe = 2”
Size of Waste pipe = 2”
Fixture unit connected to soil stack = 28
Fixture unit connected to waste stack = 14+42
= 56
141
From Table 14.13,

Length of Vent pipe = 70+5
= 75 feet
Total Fixtures connected to soil stack =28
From Table 14.12,
Size of Soil Vent = 2.5”
Wash Basin
DFU
From Table 14.4,
Trap Size
From Table 14.4,
Wash basin = 1.5”
Size of Waste Pipe and Stack
From Table 14.13,
Size of Waste pipe = 1.5”
Fixtures unit connected to waste stack = 21
From Table 14.13,
142

Length of Vent pipe = 70+5 75 feet
From Table 14.12,
143
Table 9.1: Design of down feed zone pipes
CE - 432
FU
(psi)
floor
(gpm)
Pipe size (in)
fittings, f(psi)
Demand flow
to friction and
pipe length (ft)

Max horizontal
Accumulated FU
Pressure loss due
pressure, Fp(kPa)
Average available
Length of pipe (ft)

Available pressure,
per 100 foot length

Frictional loss in psi
Down feed zone 1
6 62 248 74 30 65 2 7.5 6.88 0.90 0.13
5 62 186 65 10 65 2 11 9.15 15.10 2.19
4 62 124 53 10 65 1.5 14 11.10 31.53 4.58
3 62 62 32 10 65 1.5 16 12.40 52.45 7.61
Down feed zone 2

2 62 186 63 70 65 2 11 9.15 283.93 41.21
1 62 124 53 10 65 1.5 14 11.10 300.37 43.59
GF 62 62 32 10 65 1.5 16 12.40 321.28 46.63
144
C-9: Plumbing System
CE - 432 40'-0" C-9: Plumbing System
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-0" Wide VER. 2'-6" Wide VER.
3'-0" Wide VER.
2'-6"
2'-6" TOILET
KITCHEN 4'-4" X 7'-4"
6'-7" X 5'-8"
M.BED
12'-0" X 10'-3"
C.BED
10'-0" X 9'-5"
TOILET TOILET
6'-0" X 4'-6" 5'-1" X 4'-6"
DRAWING
11'-10" X 10'-0"
F.LIVING CUM DINING
10'-0" X 10'-7"
G.BED
11'-4" X 10'-1"
DN
LIFT STAIR
5'-0" X 6'-0" 16'-1" X 8'-0"
63'-0"
UP
G.BED NET 922 SFT

11'-4" X 9'-10" F.LIVING CUM DINING
10'-1" X 10'-4" DRAWING
12'-0" X 10'-3"
TOILET TOILET
6'-0" X 4'-4" 5'-1" X 4'-4"
C.BED
10'-0" X 11'-1"
M.BED
12'-0" X 11'-7"
KITCHEN TOILET
2'-6"
6'-7" X 7'-3" 4'-4" X 7'-3"
2'-6"

3'-0" Wide VER.
2'-11"
N
W E
145
S
CE - 432 40'-0" C-9: Plumbing System
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-0" Wide VER.
2'-6"
2'-6" TOILET
KITCHEN 4'-4" X 7'-4"
6'-7" X 5'-8"
M.BED
12'-0" X 10'-3"
C.BED
10'-0" X 9'-5"
TOILET TOILET
6'-0" X 4'-6" 5'-1" X 4'-6"
DRAWING
11'-10" X 10'-0"
F.LIVING CUM DINING
10'-0" X 10'-7"
G.BED
11'-4" X 10'-1"
DN
LIFT STAIR
5'-0" X 6'-0" 16'-1" X 8'-0"
63'-0"
UP
G.BED NET 922 SFT

11'-4" X 9'-10" F.LIVING CUM DINING
10'-1" X 10'-4" DRAWING
12'-0" X 10'-3"
TOILET TOILET
6'-0" X 4'-4" 5'-1" X 4'-4"
C.BED
10'-0" X 11'-1"
M.BED
12'-0" X 11'-7"
KITCHEN TOILET
2'-6"
6'-7" X 7'-3" 4'-4" X 7'-3"
2'-6"

3'-0" Wide VER.
2'-11"
Legends:
N Plumbing
Water Closet
W E Basin
Shower
S 146
20' * 8' * 8.5'

Overhead tank
'
25'
Note: Typical floor height 10'
Assumed, fixture connections are
located 5' above the floor level
ø 2"
Riser Pipe
ø 1.5" ø 2"
Downfeed Zone 1
ø 1.5"
ø 1.5"
ø 2"
ø 1.5"
Downfeed Zone 2
ø 1.5"
Pump
15' * 7' * 6.5'

Underground tank
Water main
Figure 9.3: Building Elevation

with Water Plumbing Network
147
CE - 432
2.5" waste 2.5" soil vent 2.5" waste 2.5" soil vent
vent 1.5" soil vent
4" soil stack vent
4" waste 2" waste 2.5" waste 3" soil stack

stack stack vent
(a) Two Toilets (b)Wash Basin at dining (c) Toilet and Kitchen
148
C-9: Plumbing System
Figure 9.4: Drainage System of the Building

CE - 432 CETP
Central Effluent Treatment Plant at the Tannery Industrial Estate,

Savar
The main objective of the Central Effluent Treatment Plant, Savar is to treat
wastewater generated in the Tannery Industrial Estate. It covers an area of 17
acres. It is a combined effluent treatment plant as both sewer and industrial
wastewater will be treated here.
Figure. Central Effluent Treatment Plant at the Tannery Industrial Estate
Description of the plant
The main components of the plant are chromium extraction unit, vortex chamber,
equalization tank, blowing house, treatment units, anoxic chambers, and sludge
treatment units.
Chromium is extensively used in the tannery, before the treatment of the

wastewater the effluent. Chromium will be extracted from industrial effluent and
will be reused. There are three chromium extraction units in the industrial estate.
The flow of waste water from the industries will be gravity flow and it will be
pumped to CETP. At first the effluent will enter into the vortex chamber, which is
equipped with fine screener. Then the effluent will be transferred to equalization
tank for ensuring a homogenous mixture. The effluent will be aerated from the
bottom with blowers. The homogenous effluent will then move to the treatment
units. In this treatment plant biochemical treat will be used. The treated waste
water will be transferred to anoxic chambers for advanced treatment for the
149
CE - 432 CETP
removal of nitrogen and phosphorus. From the anoxic chamber the treated water
will be disinfected. The disinfection will be carried by chlorination. The
disinfected water is then discharged into Dhaleshwari River. The sludge will be
dewatered first. The dewatered sludge will be then thickened and digested
subsequently. Then it will be disposed. The production of energy from this
disposed sludge is under consideration of the government.
Figure. Fine Screener
Figure. Aeration at Equalization Tank
150
CE - 432 CETP
Aerator
Figure: Chemical-Biological Treatment Unit
151
REFERENCES
CE - 432 References
CHAPTER 3
3-1. Community Report of Narayanganj, Population and Housing Census,
Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics, 2011. p. 23.
3-2. Community Report of Narayanganj, Population and Housing Census,
Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics, 2011. p. 23.
CHAPTER 4
4-1. Bangladesh National Building Code, Chapter 5; Volume 3
4-8. Class Note – 2
4-9. International finance corporation report, 2013.
4-26. Aziz, M. A. (1975). Water Supply Engineering. p. 28.
153
CE - 432 References
CHAPTER 5
5-9. Class Note - 3
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 8
154
CE - 432 References
CHAPTER 9
155
APPENDIX
CE - 432 Appendix
Appendix І
Class Notes
157
Class Note -1
CE - 432
CE 432
(Environmental Engineering Sessional II)
Design of Water Supply Source, Water Supply
System, Distribution System, Wastewater Collection
System of an Industrial Village
Shamsunnahar Suchana
Assistant Professor
158
Appendix
Department of Civil Engineering, BUET

Organogram
CE - 432
• An organizational chart/organogram is
a diagram that shows the structure of
an organization and the relationships and
relative ranks of its parts and positions.
159
Appendix
Organogram
CE - 432
• Identify all the industrial processes e.g.

knitting, dying, washing, cutting, sewing,
packaging etc.
• Identify other components of industrial village
e.g. administration, human resource,
compliance, finance/accounts, marketing,
advertising, quality control etc.
• Prepare an organogram of an industrial village
160
Appendix
considering all the processes and components.

CE - 432 Appendix
Organogram Example
161
CE - 432 Appendix
Organogram Example
162
Layout of Industrial Village
CE - 432
• Layout should include the following:

– Administrative Zone, Industrial Zone (Including individual
units), Residential Zone, Common Service Area, etc.
• Assume a highway on one side of the textile village and a river

flowing along one side of the textile village.
• Show internal road network in the layout.
• The Industrial Zone should indicate separate different sections
163
Appendix
of the overall processing steps.

CE - 432
• The ETP location should be such that the final treated effluent
can be discharged in the adjacent water body.
• The road network should be designed considering route for

incoming raw material and outgoing finished products.
• In the residential zone separate types of quarters may be

allocated for employees of different administrative status.
• Common facilities like school, mosque, hospital, community

center, welfare bank, post office, bazaar/departmental store
164
Appendix
etc. may be included.

CE - 432
• Provisions of parks, playing fields, green spaces, gardens should be

kept in the village.
• Provisions for future land area expansion for different types of

zones (e.g. residential, industrial) should be kept while preparing
the layout.
• The layout should follow grid pattern, which is advantageous while

designing pipe network for water distribution and wastewater
collection.
• The layout should be drawn using AutoCAD. Proper layering should

be incorporated in the drawing so that different parts like: overall
layout, water distribution network, sewer network can be
165
Appendix
separately visible if needed.

Assignment
CE - 432
• Prepare organogram of an industrial

village with population allocation
• Prepare the layout of the industrial

village
166
Appendix
CE - 432
CE 432
(Environmental Engineering Sessional II)
Class Note-2
Population Estimation
Water Demand Calculation
167
Appendix
Population Prediction
CE - 432
• Population calculation should be made for each zones, i.e.

Residential, Administrative, Industrial, Common Services.
• For the residential zone proper considerations should be
made in calculating family size and accommodation size of
different staff members.
• The assumptions (% of worker/staff staying inside or outside
the village) should be clearly stated for each calculation.
• Future population calculation should be made with a set of
assumptions on increase of population in different zones of
the village.
• For the administrative, industrial, and common service zones
168
Appendix
proper considerations should be made for calculating the

number of staffs working.
Water Consumption/Demand
CE - 432
• Water demand/requirement can be classified as:

– Residential water demand.
– Industrial water demand.
– Administrative water demand.
– Water demand for common services.
– Water demand for fire fighting.
• Water requirement for common service should be

calculated on basis of operating hours, occupancy type,
and number of people working in each types of service
area.
169
Appendix
• Appropriate assumptions should be mentioned before

each calculation.
1. RESIDENTIAL WATER DEMAND
CALCULATION
CE - 432
Step: 1 Calculate present population in the residential zone

based on organogram.
Step: 2 Predict future population for a certain design period

Future population = P x (1 + r)n
P= Present population
r = Growth rate (%)
n = Design period (yr)
170
Appendix
Step: 3 Depending on occupancy type, select per capita water
consumption (lpcd) as per the BNBC
CE - 432
Step: 4 Calculate water demand in lpd for present population

and for the expected design period
Water consumption (litre/day)

= water requirement (lpcd) x water consuming population
• Prepare a table for water demand calculation for residential

zone
171
Appendix
2. WATER REQUIREMENT FOR ADMINISTRATIVE
AND COMMON SERVICES
CE - 432
• Includes school, college, hospital, market, parking zone, park,

hotel, office, bus stand, rail station, mosque, community
center, auditorium, restaurants, fire service, police station etc.
 Prepare a similar table for common services
172
Appendix
3. WATER REQUIREMENT FOR
INDUSTRIAL ZONE
CE - 432
• Water requirement for industrial purpose should include two

aspects:
(a) water use for industrial production,
(b) water use for personal consumption.
• Appropriate assumptions (water required per unit weight of goods,

restricted/unrestricted facility etc.) must be listed in calculating
these water requirements.
173
Appendix
a) Water requirement for production
purpose
CE - 432
 Assume the weight of total finished goods per day in the factory
 Find the weight of the finished goods for a certain design period
 From book find the water requirement for per kg of finished goods
(Water Supply Engineering by M.A. Aziz)
 Calculate the present and future water demand for production
174
Appendix
b) Water requirement for personal
consumption
CE - 432
 Calculate the total manpower in the factory per shift
 From BNBC select per capita water consumption per day

 Calculate total water demand
 Prepare a table for industrial water demand including water

requirement for both production purpose and personal
consumption
175
Appendix
4. WATER REQUIREMENT FOR
FIREFIGHTING
CE - 432
Assumptions:
 Only one fire incidence occurs per day
 Each station/ facility should be served by two fire hydrants at
a time
 Nozzle diameter of the hydrant is 3 inches (2r)
 Velocity of water in the pipe is 3 fps (V)
 Each hydrant will supply water for 30 minutes (t)
176
Appendix
We know, Q = A x V
CE - 432
Where, A = Area of the pipe (ᴫr2)

V = Velocity of water
Q = Discharge of each hydrant
Volume of water for each hydrant = Q x t
No of hydrant working at a time = 2
 Calculate total water demand per day for firefighting ( present

+ future)
177
Appendix
TOTAL Water Consumption/Demand
• Total water consumption/demand should be calculated
CE - 432
considering suitable peak factors.

• The peak factors to be considered for different zones may vary
considering occupancy type, operations, operating hours etc.
• Example of peak factors for different zones:

– Residential zone = 2.5
– Industrial zone = 1.4
– Administrative zone = 1.4
– Common Facility zone = 4
– Fire fighting = 1
178
Appendix
 Prepare a summary table for present and future water
demand considering all types of water requirement
CE - 432
 Appropriate assumptions should be mentioned before each

calculation
 Include all assumptions with sample calculation in the main
report with details and remaining calculations in the
appendix.
 Appropriate assumptions should be mentioned before each
calculation.
179
Appendix
Class Note-3
CE - 432
Water Source Design
Water Ground Water

• Well Design
Source • Over head tank design
• Pump Capacity
• Pumping Schedule
Surface Water
180
Appendix
Water Well Design
CE - 432
• Well design means selecting the proper dimensional factors

for well structure and choosing the materials to be used in
its construction
• Prime considerations of well design are:
a) Service life
b) Cost and
c)Performance
• A properly designed well serves the following:
a) Allows the water to enter at low velocity
b) Prevents the entry of sand
c) Serve as the structural retainer to support the loose
181
Appendix
formation material
CE - 432
182
Appendix
Components of water well

CE - 432
Steps for well design are:

1. Grain size distribution for different soil layers
2. Locating the aquifer and water bearing strata
3. Determination of strainer length and position
4. Design of gravel pack material
5. Selection of strainer size
6. Yield of well
183
Appendix
CE - 432
1. Grain size distribution for different soil layers
• Grain size distribution curves are drawn for different soil

layers using soil data
• Effective grain size (D10, D30, D60) and uniformity coefficient
are found for each layer
• From the grain size distribution curves relative percentage
of different particles are found using MIT classification of
soil
184
Appendix
CE - 432
• MIT classification of soil
MIT Classification
Silt/Clay < 0.06 mm
Fine Sand 0.06 – 0.20 mm
Medium Sand 0.20 – 0.60 mm
Course Sand 0.60 – 2.00 mm
Fine Gravel > 2.00 mm
185
Appendix
Sample Calculation
CE - 432
Seive Size Material % Cumulative

Sieve No % Finer FM
(mm) Retained Retained % Retained
16 1.18 0 0 0 100
30 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.2 99.8
40 0.425 16.4 16.47 16.67 83.33
50 0.3 40.4 40.56 57.23 42.77 1.5
100 0.15 35.4 35.54 92.77 7.23
200 0.075 5.6 5.62 98.39 1.61
Pan 0.0001 1.6 1.61 100 0
Total 99.6
186
Appendix
• FM= ∑(Cumulative % retained of standard sieves)

100
CE - 432
Fine Sand 20%

Medium Sand 79%
Course Sand 1%
% Finer
0.01 0.1 1 10
Particle Size
187
Appendix
2. Locating the aquifer and water bearing strata
CE - 432
• All soil sample data are summarized in a table to find

available water bearing soil strata
Factors to be considered for locating water bearing strata
• Greater uniformity coefficient increases permeability
• Higher fineness modulus means bigger soil particle
• Higher percentage of course and medium sand indicates
higher water carrying capacity
• FM<1 → Clay and silt
FM=1 → Fine sand with silt
FM>1→ Medium to course sand which has potential to
good permeability and presence of water
188
Appendix
Summary of Grain Size Distribution
CE - 432
Sample D10 D30 D60 U = D60 FM % % %

Depth / D10 Course Medium Fine
(ft) Sand Sand Sand
130-170 0.15 0.195 0.27 1.80 1.18 1 66 33

170-210 0.12 0.195 0.3 2.50 1.26 3 67 30
210-220 0.15 0.21 0.33 2.20 1.41 4 70 26
220-270 0.17 0.28 0.3 1.76 1.63 6 77 17 *Higher % of
270-310 0.17 0.28 0.31 1.82 1.69 11 72 17 coarse and
medium sand
310-370 0.17 0.24 0.38 2.24 1.5 5 75 20 *Higher FM means
370-410 0.17 0.29 0.395 2.32 1.63 5 80 15 bigger particle
410-430 0.15 0.22 0.37 2.47 1.47 5 71 24
189
Appendix
Location of water bearing soil layer 220’ to 410’

3. Determination of strainer length and position
CE - 432
Primary factors:
1. Length of casing pipe must be selected first
2. Casing pipe must be sufficient enough so that submersible
pump always remain below water
Length of the casing pipe is the summation of four lengths:

1. Static water level at present
2. Assumed drawdown of 10’ to 15’ while pumping each
time
3. Average rate of water level declination (per year) x Design
life
4. Safety distance of 10’ to 15’
190
Appendix
• After the length of the casing pipe and depth of the
submersible pump being ensured, we can think about
strainer position
CE - 432
• Limitation of strainer length

Aquifer Thickness Recommended
Screening
< 25’ 70% Screening
25’ – 50’ 75% Screening
> 50’ 80% Screening
• As it is very difficult to maintain the vertical alignment of a
long strainer, it will not be practical to go beyond 100’
screening
• Strainer should not be extended up to the bottom of the
aquifer to allow the upward converging flow of water
191
Appendix
during pumping
Necessity of a blank pipe
1. Between two strainers of a discontinuous aquifer
2. 10’ blank pipe is placed at the bottom of the strainer to trap
CE - 432
particles that may enter into the pipe through upward

converging flow
Sample Calculation
Let, the static water level at 230’
Average rate of water level declination (per year) = 2’
Design period= 20 years
Drawdown of 15’ while pumping each time
Safety distance of 15’
So length of the casing pipe= (230+40+15+15)= 300’
Aquifer depth= (410-220) = 190’ which is more than 50’.
So 80% of the aquifer screening can be made which gives the
strainer length of = (190 * 0.80) = 152’
192
Appendix
But as we know that maximum safe length of the strainer is 100’, so

we can choose a strainer of 75’
4. Design of gravel pack material
• To design the gravel pack material, the grain size distribution
CE - 432
curve of the comparatively finest layer within the aquifer is

drawn on a semi log paper
• 70% (D30) size of the finest sand is multiplied by a factor 4-6
depending on the sand type. This is the first point on the curve
that represents the grading of the artificial gravel pack
material.
• Through this initial point on the gravel pack curve, a smooth
curve nearly parallel with the aquifer material curve is drawn
by trial and error method, representing a material with a
uniformity coefficient 2.5 or less.
193
Appendix
CE - 432 Appendix
194
5. Selection of strainer size
To retain 90% of the gravel pack materials,
CE - 432
Slot = D10 / 25.4 * 1000 ; here D10 will be of the gravel pack
material
If, D10 = 0.74 mm
Slot= 0.74/ 25.4 * 1000 = 29.13
So 4-6 inch diameter 30 slot strainer is selected having each
opening area of 30/1000 inch
3 to 8 inch diameter envelop of gravel pack material will surround

the entire screen
195
Appendix
6. Yield of well
• Well yield is calculated using strainer opening area
CE - 432
• Yield = (area of strainer x flow velocity) / factor of safety

• The factor of safety is considered assuming blockage while
operation
• Different slot size have different opening area
Slot size Assumed opening

(Steel screening)
40 slot 20%
30 slot 15%
20 slot 10%
• For PVC screen, opening area is considered to be half of the
196
Appendix
above mentioned areas

Sample calculation
For 30 slot strainer,
CE - 432
Strainer area= 15% of strainer surface area

= 0.15 x 3.14 x Diameter x Strainer length
Here, Diameter = 6”
Length = 75’
Assume, flow velocity = 0.10 fps
Factor of safety = 2.5
So, Yield of a well = (0.15 x 3.14 x 6/12 x 75 x 0.1) / 2.5
= 0.7065 x (0.3048)³ x 3600 x 1000
= 72, 021 lph
197
Appendix
Design considerations:
CE - 432
• For one pump

• In one day
• 8 hour continuous pumping
As pumping is for 8 hour per day, Yield = 72, 921 x 8

= 576, 170 lpd
* More than one well may be required if one well can’t meet the
demand
198
Appendix
CE - 432 Appendix
199
CE - 432 Appendix
Class Note-4
PUMPS
200
CE - 432 Appendix
201
CE - 432 Appendix
202
CE - 432 Appendix
203
CE - 432 Appendix
204
Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH):
CE - 432
is the absolute pressure of the fluid at the pump center line or the impeller eye
as it enters the pump suction. Two important values are NPSH required
(NPSHreqd) and NPSH available (NPSHava).
NPSH-required is the absolute pressure required by the pump for smooth,

efficient operation and is determined by the pump manufacturer.
NPSH-available is the absolute pressure of the liquid as it enters the pump unit.
The value of NPSH available mainly depends on the head and layout of pump
suction system, and is given by;
205
Appendix
NPSHava = Habs + Hs – hL - Hav
CE - 432
NPSHava = available net positive suction head, m (ft)

Habs = absolute pressure on the surface of liquid in the suction well (usually
atmospheric pressure)
Hs = suction head at the pump suction, m (ft)
hL = total head loss due to friction, entrance, valves, and fittings in the suction
piping, m (ft)
Hvp = vapor pressure of fluid at the operating temperature, m (ft)
• It is recommended that NPSH-available should exceed the NPSH-required by

1meter.
• If the NPSH available is less the NPSH required or these two values are close
206
Appendix
to each other, no water can be lifted by the pump.

Cavitation:
It is a phenomenon that occurs when the absolute pressure of a fluid
CE - 432
reaches the fluid vapor pressure.

Cavitation occurs in pumps, control valves, and other high-velocity
locations. It results in severe rattling or pinging noise. If this condition prevails
severe pitting of the metallic surface occurs. Cavitation may be reduced
by;
• Increasing the diameter of the pump suction pumping

• Decreasing the pump speed
• Increasing the suction head on the suction side
• Decreasing the flow rate
207
Appendix
CE - 432 Appendix
208
PUMPS COMMONLY USED IN WATER WORKS
CE - 432
Kinetic:
• Centrifugal
• Peripheral or Recessed Impeller
Positive Displacement:
• Plunger or Piston
• Diaphragm
• Rotary
• Screw
209
Appendix
• Air Lift
CE - 432 Appendix
Centrifugal Pump
210
CE - 432
Piston Pump Rotary Pump
211
Appendix
Diaphragm Pump Screw Pump Airlift Pump

CE - 432 Appendix
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
212
TYPICAL PUMP APPLICATION AND SELECTION CHART
CE - 432
213
Appendix
PUMP CHARACTERISTICS CURVE
Pump manufacturers conduct test and publish a series of curves that represent the performance of a
pump under various conditions.
Head-Capacity Curve: It demonstrates the pump discharge or capacity at a given head condition. The
CE - 432
shape of this curve may be rising-head, flat, steep, or dropping head. Such curves are a function of
specific pump speed and pump design
214
Appendix
HOW TO READ A PUMP CHRACTERISTICS CURVE CE - 432
215
Appendix
HOW TO READ A PUMP CHRACTERISTICS CURVE (Contd.)
CE - 432
216
Appendix
Class Note - 5
of Water Supply System
CE - 432
Layout
Designof Industrial Village
Water supply system includes:
1. Pumps and necessary equipments
2. Storage reservoirs
3. Various pipes that convey water to the consumers
1. Design of Pumping Devices

Pump is a primary unit of water distribution system. Pump and
pumping machineries lift water from the source to overhead
tank so that water can flow by gravity to the distribution
system.
217
Appendix
Types of Pumps:
CE - 432
• Submersible Pump
• Turbine Pump
• Centrifugal Pump etc.
Each type of pump has certain advantages and disadvantages.
Design of pumping devices includes:

a) Determining pump capacity &
b) Pumping Schedule
218
Appendix
a) Determining Pump Capacity
1. Divide the whole plan area in some zones like residential zone, industrial
CE - 432
zone etc.
2. Calculate the number of well/pump required for each zone.
3. Determine the capacity of each pump
Pump capacity:
i) Working Horse Power,

WHP= HQ/3960
Where, H= Total head or lift of the pump (ft)

Q= Yield of well (gpm)
ii) Breaking Horse Power,

BHP= WHP/ɳ
219
Appendix
Where, ɳ= Pump Efficiency = 75%

CE - 432
Total Head / Total Lift of Pump

= Static head + Velocity head + Friction head
Static head
= Suction head (hs) + Delivery head (hd )
• Suction head,
hs = 0 (for submersible pump)
• Delivery head,
hd = Static water level + Max building height
220
Appendix
Velocity head
CE - 432
hv = v2/ 2g
Assume, Velocity of water supply = 3 fps
Friction head
• Friction loss is assumed to be 10% of maximum pipe length
• Maximum pipe length
= Maximum horizontal distance + Maximum height of the building
+ Height of rooftop tank
Total Head, H = hs+ hd + hv + hf
221
Appendix
b) Pumping Schedule
CE - 432
1. Calculate the total present and future water demand for each zone.
2. Prepare demand curves for each zone
3. Prepare pumping chart
Method of Supply:
1. Continuous supply
2. Intermittent supply
222
Appendix
Continuous supply is always better because
• In intermittent supply, during non-supply hours distribution lines may
CE - 432
suffer partial vacuum, sucking in contaminated water from nearby sewer

pipes running close to water distribution lines
• Consumption is well metered in continuous supply
• Constant supply for fire fighting can be maintained
Method of Distribution:
1. System with direct pumping
⁻ Power failure means collapse of system
⁻ Difficult to maintain required pressure in the line under varying rate of
consumption
2. System with pumping and storage
⁻ Economic operation but high initial cost
223
Appendix
⁻ Required pressure can be maintained in the line under varying water

consumption
CE - 432
Demand Curve for Residential Area for Present demand

60
50
40
30
Average
demand
20
Demand (lph)*1000
10
0
4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00
AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM AM AM AM AM AM
Time(hr)
224
Appendix
Pumping Schedule for Residential Zone(Present)
Pumping
Time Demand (lph)*1000 Supply (lph)*1000 Net Storage (lph)*1000 Remarks
Required
CE - 432
15+10
4:00 AM 5:00 AM 10 50 65 Yes Pump-1
5:00 AM 6:00 AM 10 50 105 Yes pump-1
6:00 AM 7:00 AM 15 0 90
7:00 AM 8:00 AM 40 0 50 Yes
8:00 AM 9:00 AM 45 100 105 Yes Pump-1+2
9:00 AM 10:00 AM
10:00 AM 11:00 AM
11:00 AM 12:00 PM
12:00 PM 1:00 PM
1:00 PM 2:00 PM
2:00 PM 3:00 PM
3:00 PM 4:00 PM
4:00 PM 5:00 PM
5:00 PM 6:00 PM
6:00 PM 7:00 PM
7:00 PM 8:00 PM
8:00 PM 9:00 PM
9:00 PM 10:00 PM
10:00 PM 11:00 PM
11:00 PM 12:00 AM
12:00 AM 1:00 AM
1:00 AM 2:00 AM
225
Appendix
2:00 AM 3:00 AM
3:00 AM 4:00 AM Approx 25
Summation 680
Design of Storage Reservoir
CE - 432
• Design of storage reservoir includes the selection of dimension and

elevation of the storage tank.
• Storage reservoir is usually designed using mass-curve method, where
cumulative water demand curve and cumulative supply curve is plotted in
the same graph and the capacity of the storage is calculated from the
highest difference(s) between these two curves.
• Height/ depth of the tank is usually 10' to 15'
226
Appendix
CE - 432 Appendix
227
CE - 432 Appendix
228
CE - 432
Class Note-6 Appendix
Water Distribution Network Design
The purpose of distribution system is to deliver water to consumer with appropriate quality,
quantity and pressure. Distribution system is used to describe collectively the facilities used to
supply water from its source to the point of usage
The transmission of water from the source (or sources) to the various consumers is usually done
in two stages: distribution and reticulation.
The former term is generally used to describe the system of bigger (or trunk) mains, reservoirs
and, in some situations, pumping systems whereas reticulation refers to the interconnected pipe
network through which water finally reach to the consumers.
Requirements of Good Distribution System

 Water quality should not get deteriorated in the distribution pipes.
 It should be capable of supplying water at all the intended places with sufficient pressure head.
 It should be capable of supplying the requisite amount of water during fire fighting while
maintaining acceptable pressures for normal service.
 The layout should be such that no consumer would be without water supply, during the repair
of any section of the system.
 All the distribution pipes should be preferably laid one meter away or above the sewer lines.
 It should be fairly water-tight as to keep losses due to leakage to the minimum.
Pressure in the distribution system

Proper water line pressure ensures enough supply for customers and for fire fighting, while
protecting treated water from ingress of untreated groundwater. Minimum pressure for domestic
flow during peak demand should be at least 30 psi. Fire hydrant should be operated at 40 psi, at
least 10 psi at low pressure condition. Maximum 100 psi pressure is acceptable in small low-lying
areas. Otherwise pressure reducing valve has to be used
Layouts of Distribution Network

The distribution pipes are generally laid below the road pavements, and as such their layouts
generally follow the layouts of roads. There are, in general, four different types of pipe networks;
any one of which either singly or in combinations, can be used for a particular place. They are:
1) Branched Network - Dead End System
2) Looped network –
a. Grid Iron System
b. Ring System
c. Radial System
1. Branched/ Dead-end System

It comprises a transmission main starting from service reservoir or source and laid along the main
road with sub-mains branching off from the main along other roads joining the main road. It is
suitable for old towns and cities having no definite pattern of roads.
Fig- 1: Branched or dead-end system
229
CE - 432 Appendix
Advantages:
1. Relatively cheap as length of pipe required is less.
2. Determination of discharges and pressure easier due to less number of valves.
3. Can be easily expanded to connect newly developed area with the distribution system.
Disadvantages
1. Due to many dead ends, stagnation of water occurs in pipes which in turn promote
sedimentation and water contamination.
2. Frequent blow-off or flushing is needed to keep the system clean.
3. Repair work in mains and sub-mains cuts off water supply downstream.
2. Looped Network
Looped distribution network is an improvement over the dead-end system. Here the ends of mains
and sub-mains are connected. This network is suitable for a well-planned developed area with a
definite pattern of road network.
2. a) Grid Iron System

It is suitable for cities with rectangular layout, where the water mains and branches are laid in
rectangles.
Advantages:
1. Water is kept in good circulation due to the absence of dead ends.
2. In the cases of a breakdown in some section, water is available from some other direction.
3. Have good control over flow of water
Disadvantages
3. Exact calculation of sizes of pipes is not possible due to provision of valves on all branches
(a) (b)
Fig-2: (a) grid-iron system, (b) Ring system
2. b) Ring System
The supply main is laid all along the peripheral roads and sub mains branch out from the mains.
Thus, this system also follows the grid iron system with the flow pattern similar in character to that
of dead end system. So, determination of the size of pipes is easy.
Advantages:
1. In addition to the advantages of grid iron system, in ring system water can be supplied to any
point from at least two directions.
Disadvantages
230
CE - 432 Appendix
2.c) Radial System
The area is divided into different zones. The water is pumped into the distribution reservoir kept in
the middle of each zone and the supply pipes are laid radially ending towards the periphery.
Advantages:
1. It gives quick service.
2. Calculation of pipe sizes is easy.
3. Presence of several reservoirs makes it easy to meet the
emergency water demand.
Disadvantages
1. Presence of a number of distribution reservoirs increases the
cost of the system.
Distribution System Layout Design Procedure

Branched network:
The following design procedure may be adopted for branched network:
1. Collect/prepare a map of the area to be served with roads, streets and other features and make
a layout of mains, sub-mains and branches including location of valves and other accessories.
2. Estimate the peak flow at different points and estimate the quantity flowing through each section
of the network.
3. Assume the pipe size for each section of the using continuity equation (Q = Av ; to calculate
approximate pipe size the velocity (v) may be assumed to be around 1 m/s or 3 fps)
4. Calculate frictional head loss per unit length of pipe and then multiply by pipe
length of the pipe to find the total head loss.
4fLv 2
Pressure loss due to friction, hf = (ft)
2gD
So, pressure loss in psi = hf (ft) x 62.4 (lb/ft3 ) /144
[Here, L= length of pipe (ft) ; v = velocity (fps) ; Assume friction factor, f = 0.01 ; D = diameter of
the pipe (ft)]
5. Check pressure requirement at the furthest point from the source. Determine the terminal
pressure head taking the change in the elevation of the pipe into account.
6. In case of a difference between the computed terminal pressure and the permissible
pressure head, revise the pipe size.
Example:
Calculate the pipe size for the following dead-end water distribution system
Diameter of
Supply Area of pipe Diameter of pipe
Node Supply (lpd) Length (ft) provided pipe
(ft3/sec) required (inch2) required (inch)
(inch)
1-2 78750 0.032 200.88 1.5460 1.403 2.00
2-3 78750 0.032 334.80 1.5460 1.403 2.00
1-4 157500 0.064 200.88 3.0920 1.984 2.00
4-5 91250 0.037 334.80 1.7914 1.510 2.00
5-6 248750 0.102 502.19 4.8835 2.494 3.00
231
CE - 432 Appendix
Diameter of total Available

head loss head loss
Node Length (ft) provided head loss Pressure Comment
(ft) (psi)
pipe (") (psi) (psi)
1-2 200.9 2.00 1.684 0.730
Path-1 1.95 48.05 ok
2-3 334.8 2.00 2.807 1.217
1-4 200.9 2.00 1.684 0.730
4-5 334.8 2.00 2.807 1.217
Path-2 3.16 46.84 ok
5-6 502.2 3.00 2.807 1.216
Looped network: Hardy Cross method of approximation

In any looped network following two conditions must be satisfied:
The Hazen-William equation for hardy cross method is H = kQx
Where ,
H = Head loss
k = is a constant depending on length, diameter and roughness of the pipe as well as fluid
property. Here, we are assuming k = 1
Q = Assumed flow in the pipe
X = 1.85 for Hazen-Williams equation
The procedure for the Hardy Cross method of pipe network analysis is given below:
1. Carefully examine the network and assume reasonable rates of flow (Qa) in each pipe such
that inflow equals outflow at each junction.
2. In each loop, determine the head loss, H and H/Q for all pipes.
3. With due attention to sign, compute the total head loss, Σ(H) around each circuits.
4. Compute Σ(H/Q) for the same circuit without giving any consideration to sign.
5. Apply correction Δ to each loop.
Δ = - ΣH / (x ΣH/Qa)
• When the sign of Δ is negative, '-', decrease the clockwise flows and increase the
counterclockwise flows.
• When the sign is positive '+' increase clockwise flows and decrease counterclockwise flows.
• Pipes that are common to two loops require double correction
6. With adjusted flows, repeat the procedure for the second approximation. The
procedure is continued until the desired accuracy is attained
 After the flow is corrected for each loop, pipe size can be calculated using head loss determination
diagram (Figure -4)
 Pipe diameter and head loss can also be calculated using Nomograph for Hazen-Williams formula
(Figure -5)
232
CE - 432 Appendix
 If roughness coefficient C = 100, the values obtained from the nomograph can be used directly. But if C
is other than 100 then multiply the obtained values from nomograph by the ratio of 100 to the given
value of C
Figure -4 : Head loss determination diagram (for roughness co-efficient, C = 120)
**(you can also check the example given in “Water Supply Engineering by M.A.Aziz” in chapter -9)
233
CE - 432 Appendix
Figure – 5: Nomograph for Hazen-Williams formula (C =100)
234
CE - 432 Appendix
Example
Calculate the flow in each of the pipes in the following looped pipe network:
A flow of 45 Ips enters at joint A from a source. This water is drawn at nodes B, C, D, E and F, at
the rate of 12, 12, 4, 5, and 12 Ips respectively for consumption as shown.
Solution:
First trial with assumed flow, Q0
Length, H0/L,
Circuit z Q0, lps H0,m H0/Q0 Δ, lps Q, lps Dia
m m/m
AB 800 +25 0.0038 +3.04 0.1216 +0.54 +25.54
1 BC 400 +13 0.0046 +1.84 0.1415 +0.54 +13.54
AD 400 -20 0.0102 -4.08 0.2040 +0.54 - 19.46
DC 800 -8 0.0018 -1.44 0.1800 +0.54 - 5.57
+1.89
Sum: ΣH = -0.64 ;ΣH/Qa = 0.6471
Correction Δ = - ΣH / (x ΣH/Qa) = - ( - 0.64 )/ ( 1 .85 x 0.6471 ) = + 0.54
- 0.54*
DC 800 +8 0.0018 +1.44 0.1800 -1.89* +5.57
2 CF 400 +9 0.0170 +6.80 0.7556 -1.89 +7.11
DE 400 -8 0.0018 -0.72 0.0900 -1.89 -9.89
EF 800 -3 0.0022 -1.76 0.5867 -1.89 -4.89
Sum: ΣH = 5.76 ;ΣH/Qa = 1.6453
Correction Δ = - ΣH / (x ΣH/Qa) = - (+ 5.76) / (1 .85 x 1 .6453) = - 1 .87
Second trial with assumed flow, Q0

The corrected flow after the second trial is Q 2. More trials will give more accurate flows in the
pipe network.
235
CE - 432
Class Note - 7 Appendix
Design of Wastewater Conveyance System

(Sanitary Sewer System)
Introduction:
The basic functional elements of a conventional sewerage system includes -
1. House connections- collect wastewater from houses,
2. Network of sewer systems- for collection and conveying the wastewater and
3. Treatment plant- for processing the wastewater, and
4. Receiving environment (water or land) for disposal of the treated wastewater
Depending on the type of sewage carried by the conveyance system, sewage collection can be
categorized into three types-
1. Separate sewerage system

Sanitary sewage and storm waste are collected
and conveyed separately through two different
systems.
Storm water can be discharged without treatment;
only sanitary sewage is treated but very costly
option.
2. Combined sewerage system

Both sanitary sewage and storm water are
collected and carried together through a single set
of sewers.
Economical, large size makes it easy to clean but
however increases waste load in treatment plant,
difficulties in maintaining minimum flow during dry
season.
3. Partially combined or partially separate

system
Only one set of sewers is laid to carry sanitary
sewage as well as storm water during low rainfall.
During heavy rainfall excess storm water is carried
separately e.g., through open drains to natural
channels
Again, based on hydraulic characteristics and purpose,sanitary wastewater collection systems

further categorized as – gravity, pressure and vacuum system. Gravity system is most common
where wastewater is transported by gravity.
In a conventional sewerage system

wastewater from house connections are
conveyed to lateral or branch sewers.
Main sewers are used to convey sewage
from one or more lateral sewers to trunk
sewers or to interceptor sewers.
Trunk Sewers
Trunk sewers are large sewers that are
used to convey wastewater from main
sewers to treatment or other disposal
facilities, or to large intercepting sewers.
In our class we will design the trunk

sewer for the industrial village
Prepared by: SnigdhaAfsana, Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, BUET
236
CE - 432 Appendix
Components of a Community’s Wastewater
• Domestic (sanitary) wastewater – wastewaterdischarged from residences and from commercial,
institutional and similar facilities.
• Industrial wastewater – wastewaterin which industrial wastes predominate.
• Infiltration/Inflow – extraneous water that enters the sewer system from the ground through
various means, and storm water that is discharged from sources such as roof leaders,
foundation drains, and storm sewers.
• Storm water – runoff resulting from rainfall. Storm sewers are always gravity-flow systems due
to large quantities of storm water. Storm sewerscollect storm water from streets, roofs and other
sources.
For this class we will exclude storm sewer system design assuming all storm runoff will be
carried by surface drains
 Conveyance capacity allowance must be made for groundwater infiltration and unavoidable
inflows. Estimation of “design flow” is important because it ultimately determines the sizes of the
sewers to be provided.
Inflow to Sanitary Sewer Systems

Inflow is basically water entering a sewer system from surface sources such as- leaking manhole
covers, directly connected roof gutters, yard and area drains, street wash water etc.
Infiltration to Sanitary Sewer Systems

Groundwater/percolating water in the subsurface entering a sewer system through- defective pipes,
leaking pipe joints, cracked manhole walls etc.
Calculation/ estimation of infiltration/inflow for new construction can be obtained using the following
figure:
Average Wastewater Flows:

Amount of average wastewater flow from any area depends on the amount of average water
demand/consumption of that area and also on the type of that area. e.g., for industries without
internal reuse programs - approximately 85 to 95% of water used will be returned to the sanitary
sewer system.
In this class the following percentage of average water demand for different types of area will be
used :
Table-1: percentage of avg. water demand to be
considered as ang. WW generation
Category % of avg. water demand
Industrial 90
Residential 70
Institutional 70
Commercial 70

237
CE - 432 Appendix
Peak wastewater flows
Components of waste water flow include:
1. Peak flows from residential, institutional and commercial zone
2. Peak discharge of industrial waste water
3. Peak infiltration allowance (use fig-5)
Peak factors for industrial, institutional and commercialwastewater is given in table- 2:
Table-2: Peak Factors for Different Facilities

Category Peak Factor
Industrial 2.1
Institutional 4.0
Commercial 1.8
Peak factor for residential wastewater – use figure-6:
Figure-6: Peaking Factor for Residential WastewaterFlows
Sanitary Sewer: Basic Design Considerations

It includes:
• Wastewater flow -industrial, commercial & residential.
• Hydraulic-design equation
• Sewer pipe materials
• Minimum pipe sizes
• Minimum and maximum velocities
• Slopes and cover
• Evaluation of alternative alignments or designs
• Selection of appropriate sewer appurtenances
Hydraulic Design Equation

The Manning equation is commonly used for sewer design. Roughness co-efficient “n”in Manning’s
equationshould not be less than 0.013 for new sewers made of PVC, Vitrified clay or concrete.
- Pipe sections should not be less than 5 feet long
- For new constructions assume first class construction with true and smooth inside surfaces
Sewer Pipe Materials

Most commonly used materials are –
• Ductile Iron
• Reinforced Concrete
• Pre-stressed Concrete
• Polyvinyl Chloride
• Vitrified Clay
• Glass Reinforced Plastic

238
CE - 432 Appendix
Pipe Sizes
• Consider minimum pipe size 8 inches (200mm). However if wastewater volume is low pipe size at
least 6 inch is allowed.
• Smallest sewers should be larger than the building sewer connections in general use in the area
• Most common size of building connection is 6 inches but connections of 5 and 4 inches have
been used successfully in some areas
Flow Velocities
During design two critical velocities are considered –
i) Self cleansing velocity –
 It is the minimum velocity required to be attained at least once in a day to prevent solid
deposition along sewer.
 Minimum allowable velocity is 2 ft/sec (0.6 m/sec) at one-half full or full depth.
 If access for cleaning is difficult, the minimum velocity should be 3 ft/sec (1 m/sec).
ii) Non-scouring velocity

 It is the maximum limit of velocity to prevent scouring/ damage to sewer wall by solids in
wastewater.
 Its value depends on the
 Maximum allowable velocity:
- 2.5-3.0 m/sec for concrete sewer
- 3.0-3.5 m/sec for vitrified sewer
- 2.0-2.5 m/sec for brick sewer
- 3.5-4.0 m/sec for cast iron sewer
Sewer Pipe Slopes

Sewers with flat slopes may be required to avoid excessive excavation where surface slopes are flat
or the changes in elevation are small.In such cases, the sewer sizes and slopes should be designed
so that the velocity of flow will increase progressively, or at least will be steady throughout the length
of the sewer.
The following table shows the minimum gravity sewer pipe slopes based on manning’s equation
with a minimum velocity of 0.6 m/s. Where practicable steeper slopes should be used.
Table-3: Gravity Sewer Minimum Pipe Slopes

Size in Slope m/m
inch (mm)
n = 0.013 n = .0.015
8 (200) 0.0033 0.0044
10 (250) 0.0025 0.0033
12 (300) 0.0019 0.0026
15 (375) 0.0014 0.0019
18 (450) 0.0011 0.0015
21 (525) 0.0009 0.0012
24 (600) 0.0008 0.0010
27 (675) 0.0007 0.0009
30 (750) 0.0006 0.0008
36 (900) 0.0004 0.0006
Sewer Appurtenances
Primary appurtenances for sanitary sewers:
• Manholes
• Drop inlets to manholes
• Building connections
• Junction chambers

239
CE - 432 Appendix
Manholes
The number of manholes must be adequately spaced so that the sewers can be easily inspected
and maintained.
Manhole Size and Spacing
Size:
• Manholes in small sewers are usually about 4 feet in diameter when the sewers have circular
cross sections
• In large sewers, larger manholes may be required to accommodate larger cleaning devices
Spacing:
• Sewers < 24 in (600mm) - Place manholes at intervals not greater than 350 ft (100m).
• Sewers 27 – 48 in (700-1200mm) - Place manholes at intervals not greater than 400 ft (120m).
• Sewers > 48 in (1200 mm) - Manholes may be placed at greater intervals depending on local
conditions like breaks in grade, location of street intersections, etc.
In addition place manholes –

• Abrupt changes in horizontal direction or slope
• Pipe size change locations
Vertical Profile
• Prepared for each sewer line
• Horizontal scale of 1:500 or 1:1000
• Vertical scale of 1:50 or 1:100
• Show following items:
- Ground surface
- Street surface (where applicable)
- Tentative manhole locations
- Elevations of important subsurface strata such as rock
- Boring locations
- Underground structures
- Basement elevations
- Cross streets
- Plan of the sewer line
STEPS FOR DESIGN OF TRUNK SEWER

(Sanitary Wastewater only)
1. From the plan of the Industrial Village prepare the layout of wastewater sewer network. Identify
and mark all the junctions (nodes) of branch sewers/main sewers with the Trunk sewer.
2. Calculate each sub area or service area (in hectors) contributing to each junction/node for
determining infiltration rate allowance for each sub area.
3. Calculate population/unit used under each sub area
4. Calculate total water consumption (L/d) for each sub area
5. Calculate average wastewater flow per day for each type of unit
Average ww flow (per day) = multiplying factor (from table-1) x water consumption rate of the unit per day
6. Calculate peak ww flow per day for each unit

Peak ww flow per day = avg. ww flow per day x peaking factor (PF- from table-2 or figure-6 for residential ww flow)
7. Calculate infiltration allowance (m3/ha-d) for each sub area using calculated size of the sub area
(Use figure-5)
Infiltration and in flow (I/I) = infiltration allowance (m3/ha-d) x area (ha)
8. Calculate Cumulative Peak flow contributing to each node

Total Flow, Q (m3/sec) =total peak ww flow towards each node + Infiltration and inflow
240
CE - 432 Appendix
Design of Trunk Sewer
9. Determine size of the pipe segment in between two successive nodes using manning formula.
Assume,
Pipes are flowing full
Slope of pipe = 0.0008 in/in
n = 0.013 (for new concrete/ pvc pipe)
Using Manning’s equation,

Pipe Diameter, D (m) = 1.548 [ nQ/ √S]0.375 ------- (1)
Use next larger size as pipe diameter (Dactual) if the calculated diameter doesn’t match with
standard available pipe sizes.
10. Calculate “QFull” using Dactual in eq-1
11. Calculate velocity, VFull using manning’s equation
2/3
1D
VFull    S1 / 2
n 4
Check with V - minimum (self-cleansing velocity) and V –maximum (non-scouring velocity). Revise
diameter/ slope to satisfy this factors
12. Calculate Q  . Using Hydraulic element Diagram (figure-7) , Find out –

Q 
 Full 
 d   V 
   
,
 D Full   VFull 
13. Determine V. Check with V - minimum (self-cleansing velocity) and V –maximum (non-scouring
velocity). Revise if needed.

241
CE - 432 Appendix
Prepare longitudinal Profile of the Trunk sewer
14. From available contour diagram of the area find out ground surface elevation at each node
along the trunk sewer trench line.
15. Calculate sewer pipe invert elevation at each end (upper and lower) for each segment of pipe
e.g. invert elevation of sewer pipe at upper end = Ground Elevation – 2 m cover – Pipe
thickness (50 mm) – Diameter of the pipe
16. Calculate sewer pipe Crown elevation at each end
e.g. Crown elevation of sewer pipe at upper end = Invert Elevation + Diameter of the pipe
17. Draw thelongitudinal profile showing details of ground elevation,tentative position of manholes,
invert crown etc. for all nodes.
A typical contour diagram

242
CE - 432
Class Note - 8 Appendix
BUILDING PLUMBING SYSTEM (Part-1)
Definition of Plumbing
The plumbing includes the practice, materials, and fixtures used in the installation., maintenance,
extension, and alteration of all piping, fixtures, appliances, and accessories in connection with sanitary
drainage or storm drainage facilities, the venting system and the public or private water supply systems/
within or adjacent to any building, structure, or conveyance.
Major elements in plumbing systems

The plumbing system includes
water supply and distribution pipes: riser, up feed or down feed distribution pipes, underground water
reservoir (UGWR), overhead (OH) tank.
plumbing fixtures and traps,
soil, waste and vent pipes,
building drains and building sewers, including-their respective connections, devices, and
appurtenances within the property lines of the premises
Some Important Terminologies

Plumbing Fixture:
The water-supply system of a building distributes water to plumbing fixtures at points of use.
Fixtures include kitchen sinks, water closets, urinals, bathtubs, showers, lavatories, drinking
fountains, laundry trays, and slop (service) sinks.
The plumbing fixtures are at the terminals of the water-supply system and the start of the wastewater
system.
Each fixture is served by a soil stack, or waste stack, a vent or vent stack, and a trap.
Fixture unit:
It is the average discharge, during use, of an arbitrarily selected fixture, such as a lavatory or water
closet. Once this value is established, the discharge rates of other types of fixtures are stated in
terms of the basic fixture.
A Fixture Unit is not a flow rate unit but a design factor.
The base fixture unit measurement is based on the discharge from a hand basin. One fixture unit is
equal to the discharge from one hand basin. All plumbing fixtures have a fixture unit rating which
shows their hydraulic load when compared with a hand basin.
Riser :
A water supply pipe which extends vertically one full story or more to convey water to branches or
fixtures or to OH tank
Water Distribution in a Building

Water distribution in to building can be done in many way:
1. Upfeed distribution
Simple upfeed :
– Water fed to fixtures in a building only by the incoming pressure of the supply water.
– This method is good for buildings up to 5 to 6 stories high.
Pumped upfeed
– Water fed to the fixtures in a building by increasing the pressure of the supply water using additional
pumps.
2. Down Feed Distribution

– Uses pumps to deliver water to a rooftop storage tank of the building.
– The water in the storage tank feeds fixtures below due to the force of gravity.
– Commonly one roof top tank is used to distribute water to whole building. For tall building intermediate
tank(s) are often used to supply water at different levels.
– If main does not have sufficient pressure to carry water to OH tank, underground water reservoir
(UGWR) is provided to store water from main and deliver to the overhead tank
Prepared by: Snigdha Afsana, Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, BUET
243
CE - 432 Appendix
Design of Down Feed Water Supply System

Design Components:
1. Sizing of Water Distribution Pipes within the Building
2. Dimensions of UGWR
3. Dimensions of OH tank
4. Determination of size of riser
5. Calculation of Pump capacity

The design of the consumers’ pipes or the supply pipe to the fixtures is based on:
a) the number and kind of fixtures installed;
b) the fixture unit flow rate; and
c) the probable simultaneous use of these fixtures.
The rates at which water is desirably drawn into different types of fixtures are known. These rates
become whole numbers of small size when they are expressed in fixture unit. The fixture units for
different sanitary appliances or groups of appliances are given in the following Table- 8.5.4
The design steps are described below:

1. Draw the sketch of the main lines, risers and branches serving different fixtures at different water use
points in the building
2. Determine the number and types of fixture that will be required on the basis of the Table- 8.6.1 or as
per design requirement.
3. The demand weight of different fixture units can be computed in terms of water supply fixture unit
(wsfu) either using Table – 8.5.4 or from Table- P1
4. If the total down feed zone is supplied by more than one pipe, calculate total peak demand for
individual down feed zone using the procedure below-
5. It should be noted that the possibility of all water supply taps in any system in domestic and
commercial use will draw water at the same time are extremely remote. Designing the water mains
for the gross flow will result in bigger and uneconomical pipe mains and is not necessary. Therefore
The peak demand load (or maximum probable flow) in liter per minute may be estimated with the
data obtained in step-3 either using
a) Fig.-P1 (Hunter curve) or
b) from Table-8.5.5 or
c)
(in your calculation use 1st or 2nd option)
6. The equivalent length calculation:

Determine the length of the main lines, risers and branches from elevation & floor plan.
The equivalent length of different fittings may be estimated on the basis of the data presented in the
Table-P2(a), Table-P2(b) and Table-P2(c).
The total equivalent length is the sum of the equivalent lengths of all pipes and fittings.
7. Pressure at fixture:
In a down feed water distribution system (roof tank supply), static pressure due to gravity increases
with increasing floor height (4.32 psi or 0.3 Bar per floor of 10 ft. height at non flow condition).
Therefore, water distribution pipe in a building should be maintained at a pressure so that none of
their fittings are subject to a water head greater than 35 m (approximately 50 psi)
The distribution system should be maintained at a pressure not less than those specified in Table-
8.5.6 during peak demand period
Average available pressure loss (kPa)

Fp = P ± 9.8H – f (+ve for down-feed supply)
244
CE - 432 Appendix
Where,
Fp = Average available pressure loss (kPa) per meter of equivalent length of pipe
P = Pressure (kPa) in the water main OR zero for overhead gravity storage tank.
H = Difference (m) in elevation between storage tank and the fixture under consideration.
f = Pressure loss (kPa) through water meter or such other fittings plus pressure (kPa) required to
produce adequate flow through the fixture under consideration in down-feed system.
8. Selection of pipe size:

Commercially available standard sizes of pipes are only to be used against the sizes arrived at by actual
design. Therefore, several empirical formulae are used, even though they give less accurate results.
The Hazen and William’s formula and the charts based on the same may be used without any risk of
inaccuracy in view of the fact that the pipes normally to be used for water supply are of smaller sizes.
Nomogram of Hazen and William’s equation has been provided in Figure-P4.
For this using peak demand and available pressure loss determine pipe size from figure-P4

For water supply system with inadequate pressure to feed plumbing fixtures or balancing roof tank, the
building premises usually have a ground (or underground) tank to store water most commonly below
stair case. The water from the ground tank is then boosted up to the roof tank to feed plumbing fixtures.
1. Calculate total daily demand for the building using Table - 8.5.1 (or total demand obtained in step-5
in determination of pipe size in topic-A)
2. water is stored in underground water reservoir with extra one day reserve for emergency
requirements
Therefore total capacity of Under Ground Reservoir (Q) = 2 x Total daily demand of water (m3)
3. UGWR is usually provided below stair case. So the surface area of the tank depends on the arear
available below stair case. Say, the dimension is
e.g., surface area, (A) = 20’ x 12’.
Water depth H1 = Q/A
4. Using a thumb rule of 10:1, i.e, a 10 story building will require 10' foundation thus 10' depth of U/G
reservoir can be provided
This height should include height obtained in step-5 + 6” to 12” freeboard
Total height = H1 + Free board (6 -12 inch)
5. Finalize the dimensions of the tank

In addition to daily water consumption, an overhead water reservoir is used to store water in case of
emergency such as fire or power cutoff.
1. Assume reasonable pumping schedule to pump water from UGWR to the overhead tank. e.g., if 1 hr
pumping twice daily, tank volume needed
V1 = total daily demand (m3)/2
2. For calculating of water requirement for fire -fighting, use Table 4.4.1
Therefore, V2 = fire-fighting rate (m3/min) * 30 min
3. Therefore capacity of the tank = V1 + V2

4. Calculate appropriate dimensions for the tank.
5. In addition to height obtained in step- 4 a freeboard of 10” - 12’’ should be provided.
Note: To provide sufficient pressure, the bottom of the tank must be elevated sufficiently above the
highest floor water fixtures
245
CE - 432 Appendix

Riser pipes are used to convey water from the underground water reservoir to overhead tank and a
pump is required so that the water can flow upward through the riser pipe.
1. Total amount of water carried by the riser each time of pumping to OH tank (gpd)
= total daily demand/ pumping frequency
Say 3000 gallon is carried by the riser each time of 1 hr pumping to OH tank
Therefore, Q = 50 gpm
2. Assume velocity 8-10 fps

3. Using Fig.- P4, determine pipe size (d) and head loss (hL) (psi/100 ft)

1. Total length of riser (L) = total building height (10 ft per floor) + 10’ from UGWR + OH tank inlet
height above top roof surface.
2. Total Frictional head HL = (hL * L)/100 + 8 psi required pressure at the O/H tank + 5 psi minor loss
due to bend
3. Frictional head in ft Lh = HL *144 /62.2
4. Total Head, H = Static head + Velocity head + Friction head
Pump capacity = HQ/(3960 E).
Assume E = 60-65%
Design contents should include:

1. Typical floor plan (AutoCAD) showing location of all plumbing fixtures and layout of horizontal
pipes.
2. Details of calculation for determination of size of distribution pipes.
3. Details of calculation for determination Dimensions of UGWR
4. Details of calculation for determination Dimensions of OH tank
5. Details Calculation of Pump capacity of calculation for determination Dimensions of size of riser
6.
7. Elevation (scaling not necessary) of building showing position of UGWR, riser, OH tank,
downfeed pipe(s) etc. as in fig-P7
246
CE - 432 Appendix
Sl No. Type of Fixture Fixture Unit (FU) Minimum Size of Fixture

As Load Factor Branch, mm
1 Ablution Tap 1 15
2 Bath tub supply with spout 3 15
3 Shower Stall Domestic 2 15
4 Shower in Group per head 3 15
5 Wash Basin (Domestic Use) 1 15
6 Wash Basin (Public Use) 2 15
7 Wash Basin (Surgical) 2 15
8 Kitchen Sink (Domestic Use) 2 15/20
9 Washing Machine 3 15/20
10 Drinking Fountain 0.5 15
247
CE - 432 Appendix
Table- 8.5.1(a): Water Consumption for Domestic Purposes (Cities/Big District Towns) [In Residential Buildings]
Cat Socio-economic group, Type of Building & Other Facilities Water Consumption
A Big Cities / City Corporation Area / Big District Towns Full Facility Restricted Facility
(Population > 0.5 million) (lpcd) (lpcd)
a High income group:
a1 Single Family Dwelling with Garden & Car washing 260 200
a2 Big Multi -Family Apartment /Flat (> 2500 sft) 200 150
b Middle income group:
b1 Officer's Qrt./Colony & moderate Apartment (< 2000 sft) 180 135
b2 Small building/Staff Qrt. & small Apartment (< 1500 sft) --- 120
c Low income group:
c1 Junior staff Qrt. /flat (< 1000 sft) & temporary shade --- 80
c2 Stand post connection in the fringe area --- 65
c3 Common yard (stand post) connection in the fringe area --- 50
c4 Slum dwellers collection from road side public stand post --- 40
Table- 8.5.1(b): Water Requirement for Domestic Purposes (District Towns/Upazilas/Urban growth Centres) [In
Residential Buildings]
Table- 8.5.1(c): Water Requirement for Domestic Purposes (Village Areas and Small Communities) [In Residential
Buildings]
248
CE - 432 Appendix
249
CE - 432 Appendix
250
CE - 432 Appendix
No. of Fixture System with Flush Tanks Demand System with Flush Valves
Units (Based on Fixture Units) Demand (After Hunter)
Unit Rate of FIow1) Flow in Litre Unit Rate of Flow in Litre
per Minute FIow1) per Minute
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
20 2.0 56.6 4.7 133.1
40 3.3 93.4 6.3 178.4
60 4.3 121.8 7.4 209.5
80 5.1 144.4 8.3 235.0
100 5.7 161.4 9.1 257.7
120 6.4 181.2 9.8 277.5
140 7.1 201.0 10.4 294.5
160 7.6 215.2 11.0 311.5
180 8.2 232.2 11.6 328.5
200 8.6 243.5 12.3 348.3
220 9.2 260.5 12.7 359.6
240 9.6 271.8 13.1 370.9
300 11.4 322.8 14.7 416.2
400 14.0 396.4 17.0 481.4
500 16.7 472.9 19.0 538.0
600 19.4 549.3 21.1 597.5
700 21.4 606.0 23.0 651.3
800 24.1 682.4 24.5 693.7
900 26.1 739.0 26.1 739.0
1000 28.1 795.7 28.1 795.7
1 Unit rate of flow= Effective fixture units.
251
CE - 432 Appendix
* = R/D approximately equal to 1, ** = R/D approximately equal to 1.5
252
CE - 432 Appendix
* = R/D approximately equal to 1, ** = R/D approximately equal to 1.5
253
CE - 432 Appendix
* = These loses do not apply to valves with needle point type seat,
* * = Losses also apply to the in-line, ball type check valve.
254
CE - 432 Appendix
255
CE - 432 Appendix
Notes:
2
Values will be for one riser serving floor area of 1000 m .
* *These durations shall be for a building up to the height of 51 m. For

greater height of 51-102 m and above 102 m, the duration will be 1.25 times
and 1.5 times of the specified values respectively.
Light hazard - I :Occupancy groups, A1, A2, A4
Light hazard - II : Occupancy groups, A3, A6, A7, A8, B, C, D, E2, E4, E7, F1 & F2
Ordinary hazard – I : Occupancy groups, E1, E3, E5, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, G1 & G4
Ordinary hazard- II :Occupancy groups, G2 & H1

Ordinary hazard- III :Occupancy groups, G3 & H2
Extra hazard : Occupancy group, J - pressure and flow requirement for this group shall be determined
by
Fire Department but shall not be less than required value for Ordinary hazard-III
256
CE - 432 Appendix
Type of Building Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins *** Bathtubs or Drinking Other Fixtures
Occupancy Shower Fountains
A Residential Buildings
A1 Detached Single
Family
Dwelling 1 per dwelling or - 1 per dwelling or 1 per dwelling or - 1 kitchen sink
A2 Flats or Apartments apartment apartment apartment per dwelling
A4 Minimum Standard
housing
A3 Mess, Boarding
Houses
and Hostels
For Residence and Males: 1 for 8 persons Males: 1 for 25 Males: 1 for 8 Males: 1 for 8 1 for 75 persons 1 kitchen sink
persons persons
Residential Staff Females: 1 for 6 persons upto 150 persons. persons Females: 1 for 6 in each
Add 1 fixture for each Females: 1 for 6 persons kitchen
additional 50 persons persons
For Nonresidential Staff Males: Males: Males:
1 for 1-15 persons Nil upto 6 persons 1 for 1-15 persons
2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons 2 for 16-35 persons
Females: 4 for 71-100 persons Females: 1 for 100
1 for 1-12 persons 1 for 1-12 persons - -
persons
2 for 13-25 persons 2 for 13-25 persons

Rooms wherein Males: Males: Male:
Outsiders are
Received 1 for 100 persons upto 1 for 50 persons 1 per water closet
Houses 400 persons and add 1 and 1 per urinal or
fixture for additional 250 group of urinals
Females: - - -
Females: 1 per water closet
2 for 100 persons upto

200 persons and add 1
fixture for additional 100
persons.
For Residential Public 1 for 8 persons omitting - 1 for 10 persons 1 for 10 persons 1 for 100 1 kitchen sink
and the occupant of the room omitting the wash omitting the persons in each
Staff with attached water basins installed in the occupants kitchen
closet; room or suite. of the room with
minimum of 2 if both sex bath
are lodged. in suite.
For Public Rooms Males: Males: Males:
1 for 100 persons upto 1 for 50 persons 1 per water closet and
400 persons and add 1 1 per urinal or group or
for additional 250 urinals
persons or part thereof. Females: 1 for 100 -
Females: 1 per water closet persons
2 for 100 persons upto

200 persons and add 1
for additional 100
persons or part thereof.
(Continued to next page)
257
CE - 432 Appendix
Type of Building Bathtubs or

Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins *** Shower Drinking Other Fixtures
Fountains
B Educational
B1 Education Facilities Males: Males: Males:
1 for 40 persons 1 for 20 persons 1 for 60 persons but
Females: minimum 2 Service sink:
- 1 for 50 persons
1 for 25 persons Females: 1 per floor.
1 for 40 persons but
minimum 2
B2 Preschool Facilities 1 for 15 children - 1 for 15 children Service sink:
- 1 for 50 children
1 per floor
C Institutional
C1 Institution for Care 1 for 8 persons
of Boys: 1 for boys Urinals may be Boys: 1 for 8 boys (boys 1 for 50 persons Service sink: 1
Children Girls: 1 for girls provided in boys Girls: 1 for 6 girls or girls) (boys or girls) per floor
toilet rooms in lieu
of water closets but
for not more than ½
of the required
number of water
C 2 Custodial
Institutions for 1 unisex facility or 1 for 1 for 200 persons 1 for 10 persons but 1 for 100 Service sink:
not less that 1 for
Physically Capable each sex for 1-100 - use persons 1 per floor
by both sexes.
C3 Custodial
Institution for
2 unisex facilities or 1
Incapable unisex facility and 1 for -
each sex for 100-200
persons. Over 200
persons one additional
unisex facility or 1 for
each sex for each
additional 100 persons.
C4 Penal and Mental - 1 for 15 persons 1 for 100

1 per cell Service sink
Institutions persons
Type of Building
Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins *** Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Other Fixtures
Fountains
D Health Care
Building
D1 Normal Medical
Facilities 1 for 8 patient - 2 up to 30 patients and Service sink:
(Indoor Patient
Ward) (male or female) add 1 fixture for 1 for each ward.
Bed pan
additional 30 patients washing
1 for 75 sink: 1for each
1 for 8 patients
patients ward.
Kitchen sink:
1 for each
kitchen
258
CE - 432 Appendix
Type of Building Bathtubs or

Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins *** Shower Drinking Other Fixtures
Fountains
D2 Emergency Medical Males: 1 for 100 persons Males: 1 for 50 1 fro 100 persons
Facilities and Outdoor Service sink:
Patient Females: 2 for 100 persons - 1 for persons
1 for each ward
Ward
E Assembly Building
E1 large Assembly
with
Fixed Seats
E2 Small Assembly
with
Fixed Seats Water taps with
E3 Large Assembly 1 for 100 drainage
1 for 100 persons
1 for 30 persons persons arrangement: 1
without Fixed Seats
for 10 persons
E4 Small Assembly
without Fixed Seats
Mosque
Junction Stations, Males: Min 2, 4 for 1000 Male: Min 2, 4 for Males: Min 2, 4 for 1 for 300
Intermediate Stations, persons and add 1 for 1000 persons and 1000 persons and add persons
Terminal Stations and additional 1000 persons. then add 1 for 1 for additional 1000
Bus Terminals Females: Min 2, 5 for additional 1000 persons.
Service sink:
1000 persons and then persons -
1 per floor
add 1 for additional 1000 Females: Min 2, 6 for
1000 persons and then
add 1 for additional
1000 persons
Domestic Airport
Minimum Males: 2 Females: 2 Males: 1 2 1 per 300 Service sink:
for 200 persons Males: 4 Females: 5 Males: 2 4 persons 1 per floor
for 400 persons Males: 6 Females: 8 Males: 4 6 -
for 600 persons Males: 8 Females: 10 Males: 5 8
for 800 persons Males: 9 Females: 13 Males: 6 9
for 1000 persons Males:10 Females:13 Males: 7 10
4 shower stalls in
International Airport the
females or males
for 200 persons Males: 6 Females: 10 Males: 8 10 toilet 1 for 300 Service sink:
for 600 persons Males: 12 Females: 20 Males: 22 20 in the transit and persons 1 per floor
departure lounge
for 1000 persons Males: 18 Females:29 Males: 22 25 and
also in the main
concourse
Cinemas, Concert
halls, Males: 1 for 100 persons Males: 1 for 25 1 for 200 persons 1 for 500 Service sink 1
Theatres (for public
use) upto 400 persons. persons - persons
Add 1 for each additional
250 persons.
Females: 3 for 100 persons
upto 200 persons.
100 persons.
259
CE - 432 Appendix
Type of Building
Fountains
Cinemas, Concert
halls, Males: Males: Nil up to 6 Males:
Theatres (for
permanent 1 for 1-15 persons persons 1 for 1-15 persons - 1 for 500 -
employee use) 2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons 2 for 16-35 persons persons
Females: 2 for 21-45 persons Females:
Art Galleries,
Libraries, Males: 1 for 200 persons Males: 1 for 50 1 for 200 persons up to 1 for 500 Service sink: 1
Museums (for public
use) upto 400 persons. persons 200 persons and then - persons
Add 1 for each additional add 1 for additional
250 persons 250 persons
Females: 1 for 100 persons
upto 200 persons.
150 persons
Art Galleries, Libraries, Males: Males: Males: - 1 for 100 -

Museums (for
permanent 1 for 1-15 persons Nil upto 5 persons 1 for 1-15 persons persons
employee use) 2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons 2 for 16-35 persons
Females: 2 for 21-45 persons Females:
E5 Sports Facilities Males: 1 for 75 persons Males: 1 for 75 1 for 60 persons 1 for 50 persons 1 for 300 Service sink: 1
Females: 1 for 50 persons persons persons
F Business and
Mercantile Building
F1 Offices Males: 1 for 25 persons Males: Nil upto 6 1 for 25 persons - 1 for 100 Service sink:
F4 Garages and Petrol Female: 1 for 15 persons persons persons 1 per floor.
Stations 1 for 7-20 persons
F5 Essential Services 2 for 21-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
Add@ 3% for 101-
200 persons and @
2.5% for over 200
persons
F2 Small Shops and
Markets 1 for 500 persons Urinals may be 1 for 750 persons - 1 for 1000 Service sink:1
F3 Large Shops and
Markets provided in toilet persons
room in lieu of water
closets for men but
for not more than ½
of the required
number of water
closets.
260
CE - 432 Appendix
Type of Building
Fountains
Industrial
G Buildings
Factories Males: Males: Nil upto 6 1 for 25 persons As required by 1 for 100 Service sink:
1 for 1-15 persons persons particular trades or persons 1 per floor
2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons occupations
Females: 4 for 71-100 persons
1 for 1-12 persons Add@ 3% for 101-
2 for 13-25 persons 200 persons and @
3 for 26-40 persons 2.5% for over 200
4 for 41-57 persons persons
5 for 58-77 persons
6 for 78-100 persons
H Storage Buildings 1 for 100 persons - 1 for 100 persons Provisions for 1 for 1000 Service sink:1
emergency shower persons
Hazardous
J Buildings 1 for 100 persons - 1 for 100 persons Provisions for 1 for 1000 Service sink:1
emergency shower persons
* Some of the water closets may be of European style. The water closet(s) shall not be oriented in the east-2est direction.
** The urinal(s) shall not be oriented in the east-west direction.
*** Toilet(s) of public use shall have at least one water tap with adequate drainage arrangement for ablution purpose when the number of devotees exceed
twenty
261
CE - 432 Appendix
Figure –P7
262
CE - 432 Appendix
Figure –P4
263
CE - 432 Appendix
Class Note - 9
BUILDING PLUMBING SYSTEM (Part-2)
Building Drainage System
Drainage System:
A drainage system (drainage piping) includes all the piping within public or private premises, which
conveys sewage, rain water, or other liquid wastes to a legal point of disposal, but does not include the
mains of a public sewer system or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
Major Elements of Building Drainage System:

Wastewater drainage pipe:
Soil stack,
waste stack and
vent pipes,
Building drains and building sewers, including connections, devices, and appurtenances within the
property lines of the premises
Important Terminologies
Stack:
A stack is the vertical main of a system of soil, waste, or vent piping.
Stack Vent/Soil Vent / Waste Vent:
A stack vent is the extension of soil or waste stack above the highest horizontal drain connected to the
stack.
Waste Pipe:
A waste pipe is a pipe which conveys only liquid waste free of fecal matter
Soil Pipe:
A soil pipe is any pipe which conveys the discharge of water closets, urinals, or fixtures having similar
functions, with or without the discharge from other fixtures, to the building drain or building sewer.
Vent Stack:
A vent stack is a vertical vent pipe installed primarily for the purpose of providing circulation of air to and
from any part of the drainage system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.
264
CE - 432 Appendix
2
The plumbing system should be provided with a

system of vent piping that will permit the admission or
emission of air so that the seal of any fixture trap
should not be subjected to a pneumatic pressure
differential of more than 1 inch of water column (249
Pa).
The vent stack or main vent should be installed in
conjunction with a soil or waste stack in a building.
One vent stack may serve not more than two soil or
waste stacks.
265
CE - 432 Appendix
Circuit Vent:
A circuit vent is a vent that serves multiple fixtures on a horizontal branch, in a single story
dwelling. Circuit vents must always be paired with a relief vent located downstream of the
last circuit vented fixture and may also require an "additional circuit vent".
Relief Vent:
A relief vent is a vent the primary function of which is to provide circulation of air between drainage and
vent systems. It provides additional air to the drainage system where the primary vent is too far from the
fixture
Yoke Vent:
A yoke vent is a vent provided between drainage and vent stacks to provide circulation of air between
drainage and vent systems
Trap:
A trap is a fitting or device so designed and constructed as to provide, when properly vented, a liquid
seal which will prevent the back passage of air without materially affecting the flow of sewage or waste
water through it.
Trap seal:
The trap seal is the maximum vertical depth of liquid that a trap will retain, measured between the crown
weir and the top of the dip of the trap.
Clean-outs:
A clean-out is an opening that provides access to a pipe, either directly or through a short branch, to
permit cleaning of the pipe.
The opening is kept plugged, until the plug has to be removed for cleaning of the sewer.
In horizontal drainage lines, at least one clean-out is required for each 100 ft of pipe.
Self-
266
CE - 432 Appendix
Siphonage
The process whereby a reduction in the level of the trap
seal is caused by the discharge of the fixture to which the
trap is connected is commonly known as self-siphonage.
The phenomenon of self-siphonage should be clearly
distinguished from siphonage (induced siphonage). The
latter phenomenon also may reduce the depth of seal in
the fixture trap but due to the discharge of other fixtures
connected to the same discharge pipe. this discharge
resulting in transient local pressure reductions that siphon
water out of the trap attached to the fixture in question
Building Drainage Systems

For the design and installation for drainage piping, one of the following building drainage systems can be
adopted:
1. single stack system,
2. one-pipe system, and
3. two-pipe system
Single stack system

The fixtures in each floor are connected to a single stack without any trap ventilation pipe work.
Single stack system usually used with 100 mm diameter stack for buildings up to 5-storey height.
Cowl
100 mm Stack
Max. length 2.3 m Max. length 1.7 m
Under sink Under basin
38 mm Ø 38 mm Ø
Max. length 2.3 m Water Closet (WC) Branch

max. length 1.5 m
Under bath tub / tray
38 mm Ø
50 mm Ø parallel branch to be introduced

if bath waste would other wise enter soil
stack below WC and within 200 mm
Swept Entry min. radius 50mm
Min. vertical distarnce 450 mm

between lowest connection 135°
and invert of a drain
92.5°
135°
Large radius bends
267
CE - 432 Appendix
Single stack system

The fixtures in each floor are connected to a single stack without any trap ventilation pipe work.
Single stack system usually used with 100 mm diameter stack for buildings up to 5-storey height.
Cowl Cowl
Vent stack Soil stack

Branch vent pipe
Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access Branch soil pipe
Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access
Branch Waste Pipe
Wash basin
Sink Urinal
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access
Branch waste pipe
Branch soil pipe
268
CE - 432 Appendix
Two-pipe system:
A discharge pipe system comprising two independent discharge pipes - one conveying soil directly
to the sewer, the other separately conveys the sullage from kitchen and bath directly to the drain
through a trapped gully.
The system may also consist of ventilating pipes.
Design Considerations:
The waste branch from bath room, wash basin or sink should be of 32 mm to 50 mm diameter and
should be trapped immediately beneath such wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon trap with
adequate means of inspection and cleaning.
The minimum recommended size of waste stack is 75 mm
The soil and waste stack should be continued upward undiminished in size 0.6 m above the roof
surface when the roof will be used only for weather protection. Where the roof will be used for any
purpose other than weather protection, the soil and vent stack should run at least 2 m above the roof
surface to ensure least possible nuisance.
269
CE - 432 Appendix
The soil and waste stack should be firmly attached to the wall with a minimum clearance of 25 mm
from the wall
The diameter of a vent stack should not be less than 50 mm
The diameter of a branch vent pipe on a waste pipe should not be less than 25 mm or two-thirds of
the diameter of the branch waste pipe ventilated.
The branch vent pipe on a soil pipe should be at least 32 mm in diameter
An relief vent should be at least one-half the size of the drain it vents (no less than 1 1/4", 32 mm)
All vent stacks should extend undiminished in size above the roof or should be reconnected to a vent
header or to the stack vent portion of the soil or waste stack, at least 150 mm above the flood level
of the highest fixture connection discharging into the soil or waste stack. Where the roof is to be
used for any purpose other than weather protection, the vent extension should be in accordance with
as stated earlier in this topic
The soil pipe conveying any solid or liquid filth to a sewer drain should be circular with a minimum
diameter of 100 mm
Slopes:
Horizontal drainage piping of 75 mm diameter and less is to be installed with a fall of not less than 20
mm per m.
Horizontal drainage piping larger than 75 mm diameter need to be installed with a fall of not less
than 10 mm per m
It is a good policy to design the system for the highest possible velocity. However, velocities in pipes
with slopes greater than 20 mm per m may cause self-siphonage of trap seal
Design Steps
1. Design “Two pipe drainage system “.
2. To estimate the total load weight (DFU) carried by a soil or waste pipe, the relative load weight for
different kinds of fixtures use Table 8.6.14. Table 8.6.15 provides an approximate rating of those
fixtures not listed in Table 8.6.14.
3. Slope:
Design the building drains and sewer to discharge the peak simultaneous load weight flowing half-
full with a minimum self-cleansing velocity of 0.75 m per second.
However, flatter gradient may be used if required but the minimum velocity should not be less than
0.6 m per second. Again, it is undesirable to employ gradients giving a velocity of flow greater than
2.5 m per second.
4. The maximum number of fixture units that may be connected to a given size of building sewer,
building drain, horizontal branch or vertical soil or waste stack should be as provided in Tables
8.6.16 and 8.6.17. Using the load factor unit as obtained in step-1, calculate size of horizontal
branches or vertical soil or waste stack(s) from Table-8.6.16
For example – as shown in this picture the size of the branches and stack can be as follows
Branch Load factor Size

No. (From table- 8.6.14) (From table- 8.6.16)
1 3 40
2 3*2 = 6 50
3 3*3 =9 65
4 12 65
If branches are not too long provide 65 mm all through.
In the same way determine soil/waste stack diameter depending on total number of branches
connecting to that part of the stack and number of story in the building.
270
CE - 432 Appendix
5. Vents are normally sized by using the "Developed Length" (total linear footage of pipe making up the
vent) method. Determine the size of vent piping from its length and the total of the fixture units
connected in accordance with Table 8.6.21
6. Determine the branch vent size using Table 8.6.22
Table 8.6.14: Fixture Units for Different Sanitary Appliances or Groups
Fixture
Type of Fixture Unit Value
as Load Factors
One bathroom group consisting of water closet, wash basin and bath
tub or shower stall :
a) Flush Tank water closet
3
b) Flush-valve water closet
6
Bathtub*
2
Bidet
2
Combination sink and tray (drain board)
2
Drinking fountain
0.5
Floor traps†
1
Kitchen sink, domestic
2
Wash basin, ordinary‡
1
Wash basin, surgeon's
2
Shower stall, domestic
2
Shower (group) per head
3
Urinal, wall hung
4
Urinal, stall
4
Water closet, tank operated
3
Water closet, valve operated
6
* A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the fixture unit value.
† Size of floor trap should be determined by the area of surface water to be drained.
‡ Wash basin with 32 mm and 40 mm trap have the same load value.
Table 8.6.15: Fixture Unit Values for Fixtures Based on Fixture Drain or Trap Size
Fixture Drain on Trap Size Fixture Unit

Value
30 mm and smaller 1
40 mm 2
50 mm 3
65 mm 4
75 mm 5
100 mm 6
271
CE - 432 Appendix
Table 8.6.16 - Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be connected to Branches and Stacks
Diameter Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be connected

of Pipe
(mm) One Stack of More than 3 Stories in Height
Any Horizontal
3 Stories in
Fixture Total for Total at One story
Height or 3
Brancha Stack Branch Interval
Intervals
30 1 2 2 1
40 3 4 8 2
50 6 10 24 6
65 12 20 42 9
75 20 30 60 16
100 160 240 500 90
125 360 540 1100 200
150 620 960 1900 350
200 1400 2200 3600 600
250 2500 3800 5600 1000
300 3900 6000 8400 1500
375 7000 b b b
a
Does not include branches of the building sewer.
b
Sizing load based on design criteria
Table 8.6.17 - Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be connected to Building Drains and Sewers
Diameter Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be Connected to any

of Pipe Portion* of the Building Drain or the Building Sewer for Various Slopes
(mm)
1/200 1/100 1/50 1/25
100 - 180 216 250

150 - 700 840 1000
200 1400 1600 1920 2300
250 2500 2900 3500 4200
300 2900 4600 5600 6700
375 7000 8300 10000 12000
* Includes branches of building sewer
272
CE - 432 Appendix
TABLE 8.6. 21: Size and Length of Vent Stacks and Stack Vents
Diameter Total Fixture

of Soil or Waste Unit (FU) Maximum Development Length of Vent (m)*
Stack Connected for Diameter (mm) of Vent Pipes
(mm) to fixture
30 40 50 65 75 100 125 150 200 250 300
30 2 9
40 8 15 45.5
40 10 9 30.5
50 12 9 22.5 61
50 20 8 15 45.5
65 42 9 30.5 91.5
75 10 12. 45.5 109.5 317
75 21 33.5 82 247
75 53 28.5 70 207
75 102 26 64 189
100 43 5 10.5 26 76 298.5
100 140 9.5 8 19.5 61 228.5
100 320 8 7 16.5 52 195
100 540 7.5 6.5 15 45.5 176.5
125 190 8.5 25 97.5 301.5
125 490 6.5 19 76 231.5
125 940 5.5 16 64 204
125 1400 4.5 15 58 180
150 500 10 39.5 122 305
150 1100 6.5 30.5 94.5 237.5
150 2000 6 25.5 79 201
150 2900 23.5 73 183
200 1800 9.5 29 73 286.5
200 3400 7 22 58 219.5
200 5600 6 19 48.5 186
200 7600 5.5 17 42.5 170.5
250 4000 9.5 23.5 94.5 292.5
250 7200 7 18 73 225.5
250 11000 6 15.5 61 192
250 15000 5.5 14 55 173.5
300 7300 9.5 36.5 116 286.5
300 13000 7 28.5 91.5 219.5
300 20000 6 24 76 186
300 26000 5.5 22 70 152.5
375 15000 12 39.5 94.5
375 25000 9.5 29 73
375 38000 8 24.5 61
375 50000 7 22.5 55
* The development length should be measured from the vent connection to the open air
273
CE - 432 Appendix
Table 8.6.22: Minimum Diameter and Maximum Length of Individual, Branch, and Circuit Vents for Horizontal Drainage
Branches
Diameter of Slope of
Horizontal Horizontal Maximum Development
Drainage Drainage Length of Vent (m) for Diameter (mm) of Vent Pipe
Branch (mm) Branch (mm/m)
30 40 50 65 75 100 125 150 200 250
30 20 NL*
40 NL
40 20 NL NL
40 NL NL
50 10 NL NL NL
20 88 NL NL
40 45 115 NL
65 10 54 137 NL
20 29 73 NL NL
40 15 39 NL NL
75 10 - 58 NL NL NL
20 29.5 128 NL NL
40 15 67 NL NL
100 10 - 58 NL NL NL
20 30 94 NL NL
40 14.5 48.5 125 NL
125 10 58 149 NL NL
20 29.5 76 NL NL
40 14 39.5 NL NL
150 10 58 NL NL NL
20 29.5 76 NL NL
40 14 39.5 NL NL
200 10 58 NL NL NL
20 27.5 94.5 NL NL
40 11.5 45.5 125 NL NL
250 10 58 152 NL NL
20 26 73 NL NL
40 9.5 33.5 NL NL
300 10 54.5 NL NL
20 24 128 NL
40 8 61 NL
* NL means no limit; Actual value in excess of 150 m.
274
Class Note - 10
Schematic Diagram of Treatment
Processes in ETP
CE - 432
ETP: Physico-Chemical Treatment Processes

Coagulation
Treated effluent
Liquid waste
Screening Sedimentation
Equalization tank
Sludge disposal
Sludge
Sludge drying Sludge thickener
275
Appendix
CE - 432
ETP: Biological Treatment Processes

Domestic sewage
Flotation Aeration tank

chamber
Industrial waste
Screening
Equalization tank
Scum
Sludge return
Sedimentation
Sludge tank
thickener
Sludge Treated effluent
disposal
Sludge
drying
Sludge
276
Appendix
CE - 432
ETP: Physico-Chemical and Activated Sludge

Processes
277
Appendix
CE - 432 Appendix
Appendix ІІ
BNBC CODE
CHAPTER 5, VOLUME 3
WATER SUPPLY
278
CE - 432 Appendix
Chapter 5
WATER SUPPLY
5.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
5.1.1
The purpose of this chapter of the Code is to provide minimum standards for the design, installation and
maintenance of water supply and distribution system within a building and its premises.
5.1.2
The regulations of this chapter also provide guidelines for water requirements for different classes of buildings
according to their occupancy classification.
5.1.3
The provisions stated herein do not cover the requirements of water supply for industrial plants and process,
municipal uses, viz. street washing, street hydrant, etc.
5.2 TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this chapter of the Code. In case of
any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning provided in
this section shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this chapter.
Accessible: When applied to a fixture, appliance or equipment shall mean having access thereto, but which may
require the removal of an access panel or similar obstruction; "readily accessible" shall mean direct access
without the necessity of removing any panel, door or similar obstruction.
Air gap: The unobstructed vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the lowest opening from any
pipe or faucet supplying water to tank, plumbing fixture or other device and the flood level rim of the receptacle.
Available Head : The head of water available at the point of consideration due to mains' pressure or storage tank
or any other source of pressure.
Back Siphonage: The flowing back of used, contaminated, or polluted water from a plumbing fixture or vessel into
a water supply pipe due to a reduced pressure in such a pipe (see Backflow).
Backflow: The flow of water or other liquids, mixtures or substances into the distribution pipes of a potable water
supply from any source other than its intended source.
Backflow Connection or condition: Any arrangement whereby backflow can occur.
Backflow Preventer: A device or means to prevent backflow.
Ball Cock: A water supply valve, opened or closed by means of a float or similar device, used to supply water to a
tank forming an approved air gap or vacuum breaker and acting as an antisiphon device. Also known as FLOAT
OPERATED VALVE.
Bedpan Washer and Sterilizer: A fixture designed to wash bedpans and to flush the contents into the sanitary
drainage system and located adjacent to a water closet or clinical sink. Such fixtures can also be provided for
disinfecting utensils by scalding with steam or hot water.
BRANCH: Any part of the piping system other than a riser or main.
BRANCH CONNECTOR: A connector between water main and branch pipes by T, Y, T‐Y, double Y, and V branches
according to their respective shapes.
Building Supply: The water supply pipe carrying potable water from the water meter or other source of water
supply to a building or other point of use or distribution on the lot.
Part 8
Building Services 279
Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

Contamination : A general term meaning the introduction into the potable water supply of chemicals, wastes or
sewage which will render the water unfit for its intended purpose.
Critical LEVEL: The level at which the vacuum breaker may be submerged before backflow occurs. When the
critical level is not indicated on the vacuum breaker, the bottom of the device shall be considered as the critical
level.
Cross‐Connection : Any physical connection or arrangement between two otherwise separate piping systems, one
of which contains potable water and the other either water of unknown or questionable safety or steam, gas, or
chemical whereby there may be a flow from one system to the other, the direction of flow depending on the
pressure differential between the two systems (See Backflow).
CYLINDER: A cylindrical closed vessel capable of containing water under pressure greater than the atmospheric
pressure.
Developed LENGTH: Length of a pipe along the centerline of the pipe and fittings
Distribution PIPE: Any pipe conveying water from a storage tank/cistern or from a hot water apparatus supplied
from a feed cistern under pressure from that cistern.
Effective OPENING: The minimum cross‐sectional area at the point of water supply discharge measured or
expressed in terms of ‐ (1) diameter of a circle, (2) if the opening is not circular, the diameter of a circle of
equivalent cross‐sectional area. (This is also applicable to air gap.)
FAUCET: A valve end of a water pipe by means of which water can be drawn from or held within the pipe.
Feed CISTERN: A storage tank/cistern used for supplying cold water to a hot water apparatus.
FITTING: Anything fitted or fixed in connection with the supply, measurement, control, distribution, utilization or
disposal of water. "Water fitting" includes pipes (other than mains), taps, cocks, valves, ferrules, meters, cisterns,
baths, water closets, soil pans and other similar apparatus used in connection with the supply and use of water.
FIXTURE: See Plumbing Fixture.
Fixture BRANCH: A water supply pipe between the fixture supply pipe and the water distribution pipe.
Fixture SUPPLY: A water supply pipe connecting the fixture with the fixture branch.
Fixture Unit : A quantity in terms of which the load producing effects on the plumbing system of different kinds of
plumbing fixtures are expressed on some arbitrary chosen scale.
Float Operated VALVE: See Ball Cock.
Flood Level RIM: The top edge of a receptacle from which water overflows.
Flush TANK: A tank located above water closets, urinals or similar fixtures for the purpose of flushing the usable
portion of the fixture. Also known as FLUSHING CISTERN and FLUSHOMETER TANK.
FLUSH VALVE: See Flushometer Valve.
Flushing CISTERN: See Flush Tank.
Flushometer TANK: See Flush Tank.
Flushometer VALVE: A device located at the bottom of the tank, and which discharges a predetermined quantity
of water to fixtures for flushing purposes and is closed by direct water pressure or other mechanical means. Also
known as FLUSH VALVE.
Full FACILITIES: The modern plumbing facilities allowed to the occupants of modern dwellings or, of VIP hotels
and accommodations.
ULL OPEN VALVE: A shutoff valve that in the full position has a straight through flow passageway with a diameter
not less than one nominal pipe size smaller than nominal pipe size of the connecting pipe.
GEYSER: An apparatus for heating water with supply control on the inlet side and delivering it from an outlet.
GRADE: The slope or fall of a line of pipe with reference to a horizontal plane.
HANGERS: See Supports.
Horizontal PIPE: Any pipe or fitting which is installed in a horizontal position or which makes an angle less than 45
degrees with the horizontal.
Hot Water TANK: A vessel for storing hot water under pressure greater than the atmospheric pressure.
Individual Water SUPPLY: A supply other than an approved public water supply which serves one or more families.
LAGGING: The material used for thermal or acoustic insulation.
Vol. 3 280
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
Liquid WASTE: The discharge from any fixture, appliance or appurtenance in connection with a plumbing system
which does not receive fecal matter.
MAIN: The principal artery of the system, to which branches may be connected, for the purpose of water supply
from a supply to individual consumers. Also known as WATER MAIN.
Mechanical Joint : A connection between pipes, fittings or pipes and fittings which is neither screwed, caulked,
threaded, soldered, solvent cemented, brazed nor welded.
OFFSET: A combination of approved bends in a line of piping used to connect two pipes whose axes are parallel
but not in line.
PLUMBING: The business, trade or work having to do with the installation, removal, alteration or repair of
plumbing and drainage systems or part thereof.
Plumbing APPLIANCES: The plumbing fixtures whose operation or control can be dependent upon one or more
energized components, such as motors, controls, heating elements, or pressure or temperature sensing elements.
Plumbing APPURTENANCE: A manufactured device or prefabricated assembly of component parts, which is an
adjunct to the basic piping system and plumbing fixtures, performing some useful function in the operation,
maintenance, servicing, economy or safety of the plumbing system.
Plumbing FIXTURE: A receptacle or device which is either permanently or temporarily connected to the water
distribution system of the premises, and demands a supply of water there from, or discharges used water, waste
materials or sewage either directly or indirectly to the drainage system of the premises, or requires both a water
supply connection and a discharge to the drainage system of the premises. Also known as FIXTURE.
Plumbing System : A system of potable water supply and distribution pipes, plumbing fixtures and traps, soil
waste and vent pipes, and sanitary and storm sewers and building drains including their respective connections,
devices and a appurtenances within a building or premises.
Potable WATER: Water free from impurities which may cause diseases or harmful physiological effects and water
which is satisfactory for drinking, culinary and domestic purposes.
Private/Private USE: Plumbing fixtures intended for the use of a family in residences, or for the restricted use of
an individual in commercial establishments.
Quick closing VALVE: A valve or faucet that closes automatically when released manually or controlled by
mechanical means for fast action closing.
Receptor : An approved plumbing fixture or device of such material, shape and capacity as to adequately receive
the discharge from indirect waste pipes, so constructed and located as to be readily cleaned.
Residual HEAD: The head available at any particular point in the distribution system.
Restricted FACILITIES: The minimum plumbing facilities acceptable for the occupants of low income group.
RIM: An unobstructed open edge of a fixture.
RISER: A water supply pipe which extends vertically one full storey or more to convey water to branches or
fixtures.
ROUGHING‐IN: The installation of all parts of the plumbing system which can be completed prior to the
installation of fixtures. This includes water supply, drainage, vent piping and necessary supports.
Service PIPE: The pipe that runs between the distribution main in the street and the riser in case of a multi‐storied
building or the water meter in the case of an individual house and is subject to water pressure from such main.
Slip JOINT: An adjustable tubing connection, consisting of a compression nut, a friction ring, and a compression
washer, designed to fit a threaded adapter fitting, or a standard taper pipe thread.
Soldered JOINT: A joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with metallic mixtures of alloys which melt at a
temperature below 427oC and above 149oC.
Stop VALVE: Any device (including a stopcock or stop tap) other than a draw off tap, for stopping at will the flow
of water in a pipe.
Storage Cistern : A container, other than a flashing cistern, having a free water surface under atmospheric
pressure and used for storage of water, and is connected to the water main or tube‐well by means of supply pipe.
Also known as STORAGE TANK.
STORAGE TANK: See STORAGE CISTERN.
Supports: Hangers and anchors or devices for supporting and securing pipe, fixture and equipment to walls,
ceilings, floors or other structural members. Also known as HANGERS.

Bangladesh National Building Code 2011 281
Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

Tempered Water: The water ranging in temperature from 29oC up to 43oC.
Vacuum Breaker: A type of backflow preventer installed on openings subject to normal atmospheric pressure.
Vertical Pipe: Any pipe which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an angle of not more than 45
degrees with the vertical.
WARMING PIPE: An overflow pipe so fixed that its outlet whether inside or outside a building, is in a conspicuous
position where the discharge of any water there from can be readily seen.
Washout Valve: A device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining a tank for cleaning,
maintenance, etc.
Water conditioning or Treating Device: A device which conditions or treats a water supply so as to change its
chemical content or remove suspended solids by filtration.
Water Hammer Arrester: A device used to absorb the pressure surge (water hammer) which occurs when water
flow is suddenly stopped in a water supply system.
Water Heater: Any heating device that heats potable water and supplies it to the potable hot water distribution
system.
Water Line: A line marked inside a cistern to indicate the highest water level at which the ball valve should be
adjusted to shut off.
WATER MAIN: See MAIN.
Water Outlet: A discharge opening through which water is supplied to a fixture, into the atmosphere (except into
an open tank which is part of the water supply system), to a boiler or heating system, or to any devices or
equipment requiring water to operate but which are not part of the plumbing system.
Water Supply System : A system consisting of building supply pipe, water distributing pipes, and necessary
connecting pipes, fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances carrying or supplying potable water in or
adjacent to the building or premises.
Welded Joints or Seam: Any joint or seam obtained by the joining of metal parts in the plastic molten state.
5.3 PERMIT FOR WATER CONNECTION
5.3.1 Requirement of Permit
No water supply system shall be installed in a new building until a permit for such work has been issued by the
Authority. The addition or alteration of the existing water supply facilities in a building shall also require a permit
for their installation.
5.3.1.1 Application for Permit (Obtaining Public Supply Connection)
Application for a permit for water supply system shall be made in writing by the licensed plumber and the owner
or his appointed person(s) or agent on a prescribed form (Appendix‐ 8.5.A). The application shall accompany
building drawings showing the water supply system with the following details:
(a) Site plans showing the location of water main.
(b) Typical floor plan(s) and elevations of the building with the position of different plumbing fixtures
and piping.
(c) Materials, sizes and gradients (if any) of the proposed interconnecting piping system.
(d) Pipes (if any) conveying non potable water (for flushing water closets and urinals) shall be marked by
distinctive (durable) yellow color.
(e) Design calculations of water requirement, indicating considerations of per capita water requirement
and population.

Vol. 3 282
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.3.1.2 Application of Permit for Bulk Water Supply
In the case of large housing colonies or where new services are so situated that it will be necessary for the
Authority to lay new mains or extend an existing main, full information about the proposed housing scheme shall
be furnished to the Authority; information shall also be given regarding their phased requirements of water
supply with full justification. Such information shall include site plans, showing the layout of roads, footpaths,
building and boundaries and indicating there on the finished line and level of the roads or footpaths and water
supply lines and appurtenances.
5.3.1.3 Application for Individual (Permission for DTW Installation) Water Supply
For private water supply facility in addition to public water main connection through installing own deep tube
well, permission must be sought submitting application to water supply Authority in a prescribed form. Necessity
for such connection indicating total water requirement should be mentioned.
5.3.2 Justification of Requirement
The design calculations for water supply system of high rise and public buildings shall be submitted along with the
drawings mentioned in Section 5.3.1 above.
5.3.3 Permits and Approvals
The Building Official shall examine or cause to be examined the application for a permit and amendments thereto
within 45 days from the day of receipt of such application. If the application does not conform to the provisions of
this Code, it shall be rejected in writing, stating the reasons therefore. If the proposed work satisfies the
provisions of this Code (Section 5.3.2 and 5.3.3), the Authority shall issue a nontransferable permit.
5.3.4 Completion Certificate
On completion of the plumbing work for the water supply system, the licensed plumber shall give a completion
certificate in the prescribed form (Appendix‐ 8.5.B) to the Authority for getting the water connection from the
mains.
5.4 LICENSING /REGISTRATION OF PLUMBERS
5.4.1 License Requirement
Plumbing work shall be executed only by a licensed plumber under the control of the Authority and shall be
responsible to carry out all lawful directions given by the Authority. No individual, partnership, corporation or firm
shall engage in the business of installation, repair or alteration of water supply system without obtaining a license
from the Authority.
5.4.2 Examination and Certification of Plumber
The Authority shall establish a plumbers selection and examination board. The board will determine:
a) The requirements of obtaining license, i.e.,
(i) minimum academic qualification
(ii) minimum practical vocational and other training
(iii) minimum years of experience
(iv) total volume of works done and
b) Finally, establish standards and procedures for examination of the applicants for license.
The Authority will issue license to such applicants who meet the qualifications thereof and successfully pass the
examination conducted by the board.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.4.3 Annulment of License
The license of a plumber may be annulled by the Authority, if it is proved that a plumbing work has been
completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code and deliberately setting
aside the approvals given in the permit or without receiving the permit from the Authority.
5.5 WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
5.5.1 General
5.5.1.1 Buildings equipped with plumbing fixtures and used for human occupancy or habitation shall be
provided with the supply of cold potable water in the amounts specified in Section 5.5.2 to 5.5.4 and
at the pressures specified in Section 5.10.4.2 and 5.10.4.3. Only potable water shall be accessible to
the plumbing fixtures supplying water for drinking, bathing, culinary use and for the processing of
food.
5.5.1.2 Non potable water may be used for flushing water closets and urinals provided such water shall not be
accessible for drinking or such other purposes.
5.5.2 Water Requirement for Domestic Use
Water requirement for domestic purposes should be classified according to the socio‐economic status, type of
habitants, population of the area and public facilities present.
Socio ‐economic groups:
(a) High Income group ‐ monthly Income > 1 lac taka
(b) Middle Income group ‐ monthly Income > 30,000 ‐ 1 lac
(c) low income group ‐ monthly Income < 20,000 taka
Type of Habitants/Population
(a) City Corporation areas, big cities ‐ Population > 0.5 million
(b) Small district towns, Upazilas and Urban growth centers‐ population > 0.1 million
(c) Village areas ‐ population < 0.05 million

Water requirements for daily domestic use of a building shall be assessed on the basis of the one or a
combination of the following two methods:
(a) Number of occupants according to their occupancy classification and their water requirements as
specified in Table‐ 8.5.1(a). to Table‐ 8.5.1(d)
(b) Peak demand or maximum probable flow specified in Section P3 and P4 in the Appendix‐ 8.5.C.

Table‐ 8.5.1(a): Water Consumption for Domestic Purposes (Cities/Big District Towns) [In Residential Buildings]
Cat Socio‐economic group, Type of Building & Other Facilities Water Consumption

A Big Cities / City Corporation Area / Big District Towns Full Facility Restricted Facility
a High income group:
a1 Single Family Dwelling with Garden & Car washing 260 200
a2 Big Multi Family Apartment /Flat (> 2500 sft) 200 150
b Middle income group:
b1 Officer's Qrt./Colony & moderate Apartment (< 2000 sft) 180 135
b2 Small building/Staff Qrt. & small Apartment (< 1500 sft) ‐‐‐ 120
c Low income group:
Vol. 3 284
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
c1 Junior staff Qrt. /flat (< 1000 sft) & temporary shade ‐‐‐ 80

c2 Stand post connection in the fringe area ‐‐‐ 65
c3 Common yard (stand post) connection in the fringe area ‐‐‐ 50
c4 Slum dwellers collection from road side public stand post ‐‐‐ 40

Table‐ 8.5.1(b): Water Requirement for Domestic Purposes (District Towns/Upazilas/Urban growth Centres)
[In Residential Buildings]

B Small District Towns/ Upajilas & Urban Growth Centre Full Facility Restricted Facility
a Middle income group:
a1 Single Family Dwelling with Garden ‐‐‐ 150
a2 Officer's Qrt./Colony & moderate Apartment (< 2000 sft) ‐‐‐ 135
a3 Small building/Staff Qrt. & small Apartment (< 1500 sft) ‐‐‐ 120
b Low income group:
b1 Junior staff Qrt. /flat (< 1000 sft) & temporary shade ‐‐‐ 80
b2 Private Stand post connection in the fringe area ‐‐‐ 65
b3 Common yard (stand post) connection in the fringe area ‐‐‐ 50
b4 Slum dwellers collection from road side public stand post ‐‐‐ 40

Table‐ 8.5.1(c): Water Requirement for Domestic Purposes (Village Areas and Small Communities) [In Residential Buildings]

C Village Areas /Small Community from hand tube well, Full Facility Restricted Facility
dugwells , ponds & rivers (Non piped water supply system) (lpcd) (lpcd)
a1 Private Source (Own Tubewell / dugwell & pond) ‐‐‐ 50 ‐ 60
a2 Public Sources (Public TW/Dugwell/ other sources) ‐‐‐ 40 ‐ 50
5.5.3 Water Requirement for Fire Fighting
5.5.3.1 The Authority shall make provision to meet the water supply requirements for fire fighting in the
city/area, depending on the population density and types of occupancy.
5.5.3.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of the building for water supply requirements for firefighting
purposes within the building, depending upon the height and occupancy of the building, in conformity
with the requirements laid down in Part 4 ‘Fire Protection’.
5.5.3.3 The requirements regarding water supply in storage tanks, capacity of fire pumps, arrangements of wet
riser‐cum‐downcomer and wet riser installations for buildings above 15 m in height, depending upon
the occupancy use, shall be in accordance with Section 4.2 of Part 4.
5.5.4 Water Requirement for Special Equipment
5.5.4.1 Water supply in many buildings is also required for many other applications other than domestic use,
which must be identified in the initial stages of planning so as to provide the requisite water quantity,
storage capacity and pressure as required for each application.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.5.4.2 In such instances information about the water use and the quality required may be obtained from the
users. Some typical uses other than domestic use and fire fighting purposes are air conditioning and air
washing, swimming pools and water bodies and gardening. The water requirement for special
equipment like air‐conditioning or such others shall be based on the specification of the manufacturer.

Table 8.5.1(d): Domestic Water Requirements for Various others Occupancies and Facility Groups

Class of For Full a For Restricted
Occupancy Occupancy Groups Facilities Facilities
(lpcd) (lpcd)
Occupancy A: A1: Mess, Hostels, or Boarding House 135 70
Residential A2: Minimum Standard Housing ‐ 70
A3: Hotels or Lodging House (Per bed) 300 135
A4: Hotel (up to 4 Star) 180 ‐‐‐
A5: Hotels (up to 5 Star) 320 ‐‐‐
A6: Gardening and Sprinkling
A7: Car Washing
Occupancy B: B1: Educational Facilities 70 45
Educational B2: Preschool Facilities 50 35
Occupancy C: C1: Institution for Children's Care 180 100
Institutional C2: Custodian Institution for Capable 180 100
C3: Custodian Institution for Incapable 120 70
C4: Penal and Mental Institution 120 70
Occupancy D: D1: Normal Medical Facilities/ Small Hospitals 340 225
Health Care D2: Big Hospitals (Over 100 beds) 450 250
D3: Emergency Medical Facilities 300 135
D4: Nurses & Medical Quarters 250 135

Table 8.5.1(d) Cont.: Domestic Water Requirements for Various others Occupancies and Facility Groups

Class of For Full a For Restricted
Occupancy Occupancy Groups Facilities Facilities
(lpcd) (lpcd)
Occupancy E: E1: Large Assembly with Fixed Seats (per seat) 90 45
Assembly E2: Small Assembly with Fixed Seats (per seat) 90 45
E3: Large Assembly without Fixed Seats b 8 5
E4: Small Assembly without Fixed Seats 8 5
E5: Sports Facilities 8 5
Occupancy F: F1: Offices 45 30

Business and F2: Small Shops and Markets 45 30
Mercantile F3: Large Shops and Markets 45 30
F4: Garage and Petrol Stations 70 45
F5: Essential Services 70 45
F6: Restaurant 70 50
Occupancy G: G1: Low Hazard Industries 40 25
Industrial G2: Moderate Hazards Industries 40 25
Vol. 3 286
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
Occupancy H: H1: Low Fire Risk Storage 10 6

Storage H2: Moderate Fire Risk Storage 10 6
Occupancy J: J1: Explosive Hazard Building 8 5
Hazardous J2: Chemical Hazard Building 8 5
Occupancy Kc K1: Private Garage & Special Structure 8 5
Miscellaneous K2: Fences, Tanks and Towers ‐ 3
a For full facility in occupancy classifications A, B, C and D, the water requirement value includes 25% hot water.
b In the case of mosques, the water requirements given above shall be adequate for ablution and other uses of
one devotee per prayer. The appropriate LPCD value may be calculated on this basis.
c Water requirement for occupancy K is shown as a provision for unknown visitors only.
5.6 ESTIMATION OF DEMAND LOAD
5.6.1
Estimates of total water supply requirements for buildings shall be based on the estimation of total present and
predicted future population and per capita water requirement as mentioned in section 5.5.
5.6.2
In making assessment of water supply requirements of large complexes, the future occupant load shall be kept in
view. Use may be made of the following methods for estimating future requirements
(a) demographic method of population projection,
(b) arithmetic progression method,
(c) geometrical progression method,
(d) method of varying increment or incremental increase,
(e) logistic method,
(f) graphical projection method, and
(g) graphical comparison method.
5.6.3
For residential buildings, the requirements of water shall be based on the actual number of occupants; where this
information is not available, the number of occupants for each residential unit may be based on a family size
around 5 (five). For assessing the population in other occupants, reference may be made to Part 4 ‘Fire
Protection’.
5.6.4
To estimate office building occupancy, allow 7.4‐9.3 sqm (80‐100 sq ft) of floor space per person, depending on
the type of office building, exclusive of elevator and stair space, corridors, or service areas.
5.6.5
To determine the present and future water requirement:
(a) Classify the total population based on the basis socio‐economic status (Higher/middle/lower income
group & slum dwellers)
(b) Determine per capita water requirement for different categories (types) of people for different type of
domestic, recreational, and commercial uses.
(c) Multiply the population with per capita water consumption to determine the present and future water
requirement.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.7 WATER SOURCES AND QUALITY
5.7.1 Sources of Water
The origin of all sources of water is rainfall, Water can be collected as it falls as rain before it reaches the ground;
or as surface water when it flows over the ground or is pooled in lakes or ponds; or as ground water when it
percolates into the ground and flows or collects as ground water; or from the sea into which it finally flows.
Surface waters are physically and microbially contaminated and cannot be used without treatment, on the other
hand ground water sources are chemically contaminated and treatment may be necessary in many cases.
5.7.2 Quality of Water
The quality of water to be used for drinking shall be maintained using WHO Water Safety Plan (WSP) and at least
comply with the Bangladesh Standard (ECR, 1997) and WHO Guideline Values (2004) as presented in Table‐5.Q1
of Appendix‐ 8.5.D. For purposes other than drinking, water if supplied separately, shall be absolutely safe from
bacteriological contamination so as to ensure that there is no danger to the health of the users due to such
contaminants.
5.7.3 Waste Water Reclamation
Treated sewage or other waste water of the community may be utilized for non‐domestic purposes such as water
for cooling, flushing, lawns, parks, fire fighting and for certain industrial purposes after giving the necessary
treatment to suit the nature of the use. This supply system shall be allowed in residences only if proper provision
is made to avoid any cross connection of this treated waste water with domestic water supply system.
Whenever a building is used after long intervals, the water quality of the stored water must be checked so as to
ensure that the water is safe for use as per water quality requirements specified in this Code.
5.8 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Each floor or unit within the water supply system shall be provided with a control valve in addition to the main
control valve at the entrance of the system. One of the following public water supply systems shall be adopted for
distributing water to the plumbing fixtures within the building [Figures 8.5.C.2(a), 2(b) & 2(c) of Appendix‐ 8.5.C]
5.8.1 Direct Connection to Water Main
For continuous water supply system with sufficient pressure to feed all plumbing fixtures during peak demand
period, the direct connection of water distribution system to the water mains may be adopted. However, direct
pumping from the public water main should strictly be prohibited.
5.8.2 System Incorporating Balancing Roof Tank
For continuous water supply system with inadequate pressure only during peak demand hour or for intermittent
water supply with sufficient pressure to feed balancing tank, a balancing roof tank shall be required to feed
plumbing fixtures within the building. The connection to the balancing roof tank from the water main or from
ground tank or from individual water sources shall be through a non‐return valve.
5.8.3 System Incorporating Ground Tank
For water supply system with inadequate pressure to feed plumbing fixtures or balancing roof tank, the building
premises shall have a ground (or underground) tank to store water. The water from the ground tank shall be
boosted up to the roof tank to feed plumbing fixtures. The connection of water main to the ground tank shall be
through a ball valve system. Installation of booster pump directly into the water main shall not be allowed. Since,
this system cannot ensure protection against possible contamination (particularly during flood), disinfection
system should be incorporated.
5.8.4 Individual Water Supply
In the absence of a public water supply system, or In case of need of additional supply of water, the building
premises shall have individual water supply as specified in Section 5.23.1. The water from the sources (DTW) shall
be boosted up to the roof storage tank to feed plumbing fixtures. The system shall be protected as specified in
Section 5.13.3 to 5.23.7.
Vol. 3 288
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.9 STORAGE OF WATER
5.9.1 Capacity of Storage Tank
5.9.1.1
The type and capacity of a storage tank shall be determined considering the following factors:
(a) The rate and regularity of supply;
(b) The frequency of replenishment of the storage tank during 24 hours;
(c) Building occupancy classification;
(d) Hours of supply of water at sufficiently high pressure to fill up the roof storage tank in absence of a ground
(or underground) storage tank;
(e) The amount of water required for fire fighting and method of fire fighting system (Section 4.2, Part 4)
(f) The amount of water required by special equipment (Section 5.5.4).

5.9.1.2
The size and volume of a storage tank shall be calculated considering the following factors:
a) The amount of storage to be provided is a function of capacity of the distribution network, the location of the
service storage, and the use to which it is to be put.
b) To compute the required equalizing or operating storage, a mass diagram or hydrograph indicating the hourly
rate of consumption is required.
The procedure to be used in determining the needed storage volume follows:
a) Obtain a hydrograph of hourly demands for the maximum day, through a study of available records.
b) Tabulate the hourly demand data for the maximum day and draw a cumulative demand curve,
c) The required operating storage is found by comparing (maximum deviation) the cumulative demand
curve (S ‐ Shaped Curve) with cumulative pumping curve (Straight line) plotted on it..
c) The required capacity of a tank varies with the capacity and running time of the house or fill pumps, however,
following procedure may be followed to determine the capacity of storage tanks and pump:
a) Capacity of Roof Tank = ½ x Total daily demand of water (m3) + 1 hr. reserve (m3) for firefighting
requirement (for tall building). Therefore, two times filling of roof tank will meet the daily requirement.
b) Capacity of Delivery Pump = Peak hourly demand of water, lph. Therefore, daily pumping period would
be around 7 ‐ 8 hours (2‐3 hours in the morning + 3 hours in the afternoon + 2 hours in the evening).
c) Capacity of Under Ground Reservoir = 1 x Total daily demand of water (m3) + 1 hr. reserve (m3) for
firefighting (for tall building). For emergency requirement 2‐3 days daily demand of water is sometimes
stored.

5.9.2 Construction of Storage Tank
5.9.2.1 General
Storage tank shall be easily accessible for inspection and cleaning. The tank shall be provided with adequate size
of valved drains at its lowest point in accordance with Table 8.5.2. The water supply inlet into the storage tank
shall be at an elevation that is required for an air gap in an open tank with overflow (Section 5.18.6) or 100 mm

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

above the overflow whichever is greater. The diameter of overflow pipe shall not be less than the size shown in
Table 8.5.3 for the specific discharge into storage tank. The storage tank shall be equipped with water tight and
vermin and rodent proof cover. The tank shall be provided with return bend vent pipe with an open area not less
than half the area of the riser (up feed or down feed). All openings (overflow pipe and vent pipe) shall be provided
with corrosion resistant screens against the entrance of insects and vermin. There must be at least two
compartments/units for alternative cleaning.

Table‐ 8.5.2: Sizes of Storage Tank Drainage Pipes
Tank Capacity (V) Diameter of Drainage Pipe
in Litres ( ) (mm)
V ≤ 2800 25
2800 < V ≤ 5500 38
5500 < V ≤ 11000 50
11000 < V ≤ 19000 63
19000 < V ≤ 28000 75
28000 <V 100
Table 8.5.3: Sizes of Overflow Pipes for Storage Tank
Maximum Discharge (Q) of Diameter of Overflow Pipe
Water Supply Pipe into Storage Tank (l/min) (mm)
Q ≤ 190 50
190 < Q ≤ 570 63
570 < Q ≤ 760 75
760 < Q ≤ 1500 100
1500 < Q ≤ 2650 125
2650 < Q ≤ 3800 150
3800 < Q 200

5.9.2.2 Roof Storage Tank
The roof storage tank shall be constructed with prestressed or reinforced concrete or ferrocement or galvanized
steel or of the material that will resist any action by the plain or chlorinated water. The tank shall be made of
water tight without the use of putty. Tanks made of non‐galvanized metal sheets shall be coated internally with a
nontoxic material which does not impart a taste or odor. The metal storage tank shall be coated externally with a
good quality anticorrosive weather resistant paint. The outlet of storage tank to the distribution system shall be at
least 50 mm above the tank bottom.
To provide sufficient pressure, the bottom of the tank must be elevated sufficiently above the highest floor water
fixtures.
Vent pipe should be provide to avoid any air lock and should be placed where the horizontal branch pipes connect
the vertical down feed pipes (not adjacent to storage tank and at interconnection place between storage tank
and distribution pipes).
5.9.2.3 Ground or Underground Storage Tank
The ground or underground storage tank shall be constructed of either prestressed or reinforced concrete or
ferrocement. The tank shall be absolutely waterproof and have a water tight cast iron manhole cover suitable for
inspection. The inside and outside of the tank may be coated with nontoxic and waterproof materials. The ground
tank shall be placed at a location so as to avoid contamination by flood water or any other sources. Each
compartment/units should be divided in two chambers with provision of sump for longer contact time with
chlorine and easy cleaning
Vol. 3 290
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.10 DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
5.10.1 Rate of Flow of Water
One of the important items that needs to be determined before the sizes of pipes and fittings for any part of the
water piping system may be decided upon, is the rate of flow in the service pipe which, in turn depends upon the
number of hours for which the supply is available at sufficiently high pressure. If the number of hours for which
the supply is available is less, there will be large number of fittings in use simultaneously and the rate of flow will
be correspondingly large.
The data required for determining the size of the communication and service pipes are:
a) the maximum rate of discharge required at peak demand period (Peak hourly demand of water)
Total daily requiremen t of water

= X Peak Factor (usually 2.2)
Hours of water consumptio n ( usually 15 − 17 hours )
b) the length of the pipe; and
c) the head loss by friction in pipes, fittings and meters. For head loss calculation in piping system‐
i) Determine the total length of pipe and calculate the equivalent Pipe Length (Head Loss from bend, gate valves, reducer
etc.) from Tables 8.5.C2(a), C2(b) and C(c) of Appendix – 8.5.C.
ii) Assume the probable maximum velocity of flow (v) or tentative diameter of pipes (d),
considering maximum permissible head loss of 1.5 ‐1.6 m/ 100 m
For 13 mm and 50 mm diameter pipe: 0.30 ‐ 0.60 m/sec
iii) Determination of total head loss (hf) from Hazen William's Nomograph (Figure‐8.5.C.4 of Appendix‐ 8.5.C) or friction loss
4 fLv2
formula, hf = 2 gd where, f = friction loss factor, L = length of pipe, v = velocity of flow and d = diameter of pipe.

5.10.2 Discharge Computation
5.10.2.1
Based on Fixture Units‐ The design of the consumers’ pipes or the supply pipe to the fixtures is based on:
a) the number and kind of fixtures installed;
b) the fixture unit flow rate; and
c) the probable simultaneous use of these fixtures.
The rates at which water is desirably drawn into different types of fixtures are known. These rates become whole
numbers of small size when they are expressed in fixture unit. The fixture units for different sanitary appliances or
groups of appliances are given in the following Table‐ 8.5.4
Table‐ 8.5.4: Fixture Unit for different Types of Fixtures with Inlet Pipe Diameter
Sl No. Type of Fixture Fixture Unit (FU) Minimum Size of

As Load Factor Fixture Branch, mm
1 Ablution Tap 1 15
2 Bath tub supply with spout 3 15
3 Shower Stall Domestic 2 15

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

Sl No. Type of Fixture Fixture Unit (FU) Minimum Size of

As Load Factor Fixture Branch, mm
4 Shower in Group per head 3 15
5 Wash Basin (Domestic Use) 1 15
6 Wash Basin (Public Use) 2 15
7 Wash Basin (Surgical) 2 15
8 Kitchen Sink (Domestic Use) 2 15/20
9 Washing Machine 3 15/20
10 Drinking Fountain 0.5 15
5.10.2.2 Probable Simultaneous Demand (Hunter Curve)
The possibility that all water supply taps in any system in domestic and commercial use will draw water at the
same time are extremely remote. Designing the water mains for the gross flow will result in bigger and
uneconomical pipe mains and is not necessary. A probability study made by Hunter suggests the relationship as
shown in Figure‐8.5.C.1 of Appendix‐ 8.5.C, and may also be calculated from Table‐8.5.5.
5.10.3 Pipe Size Computation
Commercially available standard sizes of pipes are only to be used against the sizes arrived at by actual design.
Therefore, several empirical formulae are used, even though they give less accurate results. The Hazen and
William’s formula and the charts based on the same may be used without any risk of inaccuracy in view of the fact
that the pipes normally to be used for water supply are of smaller sizes. Nomogram of Hazen and William’s
equation has been provided in Figure‐8.5.C.4 of Appendix‐ 8.5.C.
5.10.4 General Features of Distribution System Design
5.10.4.1
The water supply system shall be designed to supply minimum but requisite quantity of water to all fixtures,
devices and appurtenances in every section of the building with adequate pressure. The design requirements of a
water supply system are presented in Table 8.5.6.
5.10.4.2
For a down feed water distribution system (roof tank supply), static pressure due to gravity increases with
increasing floor height (4.32 psi or 0.3 Bar per floor of 10 ft. height at non flow condition). Therefore, water
distribution pipe in a building shall be maintained at a pressure so that none of their fittings shall are subject to a
water head greater than 35 m (approximately 50 psi).
Table‐ 8.5.5: Probable Simultaneous Demand
No. of System with Flush Tanks System with Flush Valves

Fixture Units Demand (Based on Fixture Units) Demand (After Hunter)
Unit Rate of Flow in Litre Unit Rate of Flow in Litre
1
FIow ) per Minute FIow1) per Minute
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
20 2.0 56.6 4.7 133.1
40 3.3 93.4 6.3 178.4
60 4.3 121.8 7.4 209.5
80 5.1 144.4 8.3 235.0
100 5.7 161.4 9.1 257.7
120 6.4 181.2 9.8 277.5
140 7.1 201.0 10.4 294.5
160 7.6 215.2 11.0 311.5
180 8.2 232.2 11.6 328.5
Vol. 3 292
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
200 8.6 243.5 12.3 348.3

220 9.2 260.5 12.7 359.6
240 9.6 271.8 13.1 370.9
300 11.4 322.8 14.7 416.2
400 14.0 396.4 17.0 481.4
500 16.7 472.9 19.0 538.0
600 19.4 549.3 21.1 597.5
700 21.4 606.0 23.0 651.3
800 24.1 682.4 24.5 693.7
900 26.1 739.0 26.1 739.0
1000 28.1 795.7 28.1 795.7
1
Unit rate of flow= Effective fixture units.
5.10.4.3
The distribution system shall be maintained at a pressure not less than those specified in Table 8.5.6 during peak
demand period.
5.10.4.4
The minimum size of supply pipe for different fixtures shall be in accordance with Table 8.5.6. The fixture supply
shall not terminate more than 0.76 m (2.5 ft) from the point of connection to the fixture. A reduced size flexible
water connection pipe shall be used.
5.10.4.5
The water flow velocity in the distribution system shall be controlled to minimize the possibility of water hammer.
5.10.4.6
The design of water distribution system shall conform to approved engineering practices. An alternative guide to
the design of a building water distribution system is also presented in Appendix 8.5.C.
Note : The sizing of water distribution piping within the building may be made either by considering the velocity
of flow or by velocity of flow and pressure loss as governing parameters. The first method have limited
application for one or two storey buildings provided the minimum available pressure is sufficient to operate the
highest or most remote fixtures during peak demand period. The second method provides better estimate of
pipe sizes for a water distribution system.
5.10.5 Design of Water Distribution Pump
The capacity of a water delivery pump can be calculated from the estimated maximum rate of flow (Q) of water in
gpm, and total head (H = hs + hd + hf + hv) of supply of water in ft and using the following formula:
Break Horse Power, BHP = H x Q x Efficiency of pump in %.
3960
Static head, hs is the total suction lift of water (sum of vertical distance between the underground reservoir and
pump level and delivery head, hd is the vertical distance between the pump level and roof tank storage point.
Frictional head loss, hf can be determined for whole length (vertical and horizontal) of pipe flow using the
procedures described in section 5.10.1(c).
v2
Velocity head, hv = 2 g where, v = velocity of flow of water at the discharge point in the roof tank.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.11 WATER DISTRIBUTION IN TALL BUILDINGS
5.11.1 Distribution Methods
In tall buildings some of the fixtures at the lower level may be subject to excessive pressure. The sanitary
appliances and fittings in tall buildings shall not be subject to a pressure of greater than 350 kPa. This shall be
achieved by one or a combination of the following two methods :
a) Zoning Floors by Intermediate Tank : High rise buildings shall be zoned by providing intermed4ate tanks on
different floors, each feeding a zone ranging from 5‐6 storeys so that the plumbing fixtures are not subjected to
excessive pressure. Distribution in each zone shall be through independent down‐take pipes from intermediate
tanks as shown in Figures 8.5.C.3(a), 8.5.C.3(b), 8.5.C.3(c) and 8.5.C.3(d) of Appendix‐ 8.5.C. The floors on which
an intermediate tanks are located shall be fed from the story above it.
i) System Incorporating Intermediate Tanks Supplied by Storage Tank ‐ Water required for the building
shall be pumped from the underground tank to the storage tank. The intermediate tanks shall be fed
from the storage tank through a separate down take pipe.
ii) System Incorporating Intermediate Tanks Supplied by Independent Pumps ‐ Alternatively the
intermediate tanks may be supplied from the underground tank through independent pumps
Table 8.5.6: Water Supply System Design Requirements
Minimum Size of Required Flow Required
Fixture Supply Control Supply Pipe Pressure Flow Rate
(mm) (kPa) (lpm)
Bathroom group Flush tank ‐ 55 ‐‐
Bathroom group Flushometer valve ‐ 55 ‐‐
Bathtub Faucet 13 55 15.1
Clothes washer 13 55 ‐‐
Combination fixture Faucet 13 55 ‐‐
Dishwashing machine 13 55 10.4
Drinking fountain Faucet 13 55 2.8
Kitchen sink Faucet 13 55 9.5
Laundry tray Faucet 13 55 15.1
Wash basin Faucet 19 55 ‐‐
Pedestal urinal Flush tank 13 55 56.8
Pedestal urinal Flushometer valve 19 100 56.8
Restaurant sink Faucet 19 55 ‐‐
Service sink Faucet 13 55 11.4
Shower head Mixing valve 13 55 11.4
Water closet Flush tank 19 55 11.4
Water closet Flushometer tank 19 55 6.1
Water closet Flushometer valve 25 100 132
For fixture not listed here but maximum 13 55 ‐‐
supply size requirement 19 55 ‐‐
25 100 ‐‐
Note: 1 psi = 6.895 kPa (1 kPa = 0.145 psi), 1 gallon = 3.785 liter
b) System Incorporating Pressure Reducing Valves: The excessive pressures suffered by different fixtures shall
be minimized by pressure reduction valves.
c) Hydro‐Pneumatic System: This system may be adopted where the source is independent of public water
supply system. In this system the supply shall be through a pneumatic pressure vessel fitted with accessories
like non‐return and pressure relief valves. The pump and compressor shall be automatically controlled
through an electric control panel to provide air and water as and when needed.
Vol. 3 294
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.11.2 Recirculation of Waste Water
Recirculation of cooling water and/or waste water from wash basin to the cistern of water closets and urinals in
the lower floor may be provisioned only through a separate tank. No connection between the potable water
supply line and the re‐circulated waste water line shall be allowed with or without any non‐reflex or non‐return
valves.
5.12 HOT WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
5.12.1 Hot Water Requirements
For a residential building, hot water may be supplied to all plumbing fixtures and equipment used for bathing,
washing, cleansing, laundry and culinary purposes. For a nonresidential building, hot water may be supplied for
bathing and washing purposes. Water requirement for hot water supply shall be in accordance with Section 5.5.
5.12.2 Storage Temperature
The design of hot water supply system may be based upon the following temperature requirement :
Scalding 68oC
Hot bath 41oC
Warm bath 37oC
Tepid bath 30oC
Sink 60oC
5.12.3 Storage Capacity
The capacity of hot water vessel shall be based on the maximum short time demand of the premises.
5.12.4 Hot Water Heater
The hot water heater shall conform to the following standards : BS 758, BS 779, BS 843, BS 855, BS 1250, BS 2883
and those specified in Part 5 of this Code.
5.12.5 Cold Water Supply Connection to Water Heaters
The connection of cold water supply piping into water heater shall be made near its bottom. The minimum size of
cold water supply piping shall be based on the probable hot water demand of different fixtures but not less than
25 mm. The supply pipe shall deliver cold water into hot water cylinder as follows:
a) The water heater (electric or gas) of less than 15 liters storage capacity may be directly connected to the
water main through a non‐return valve.
b) The storage heater of 20 to 70 liters capacity may be connected directly to the water main through a non‐
return valve and with an additional device that will prevent the siphonage of hot water back to the water
main.
c) The enclosed water heater with storage capacity greater than 70 liters shall be fed from the storage tank. This
water heater shall not be connected directly to the water main.
d) The water supply connection to an open vessel type water heater may be made with an air gap of at least 15
mm above the top edge of the water heater. Ball valve connection shall not be used to control the flow of
water into this water heater.
5.12.6 Hot Water Distribution Piping
The connection of hot water distribution pipe to the hot water cylinder shall be at the top of the cylinder. The
installation of piping shall be such as to avoid airlock. In case of hot water horizontal piping the gradient shall not
be less than 1 in 250.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.12.6.1
The procedure for sizing may be the same as that for cold water distribution system in Sec 5.10 but in no case
shall the size be less than that specified in Table‐ 8.5.7.
Table‐ 8.5.7: Minimum Pipe Size for Hot Water Piping
Different Pipes Minimum Diameter(mm)

The size of main distributing pipe that supplies hot water to the fixtures 25
in the same storey of the hot water cylinder
The size of main distributing pipe that supplies hot water to the fixtures 19
not in the same storey of hot water cylinder
Branch pipe supplying hot water to the bath tub or shower 19
Branch pipe supplying hot water to the sink 19
Branch pipe supplying hot water to the wash basin 19
5.12.6.2
The design consideration of hot water piping shall be such that hot water will appear quickly at the outlet of
different fixtures. To improve the situation, a secondary circulation system with flow and return pipe from and to
the hot water cylinder (Fig 8.5.1) may be adopted. The length of hot water distribution pipe measured along the
pipe from the top of draw off tap to the hot water cylinder or the secondary circulation pipe shall not exceed the
length prescribed in Table 8.5.8. The draw‐off tap shall not be connected to the primary flow or return pipe.
Table‐ 8.5.8: Maximum Permissible Length of Hot Water Draw Off Pipe
Largest Internal Diameter (D) of Pipe Length of Pipe (m)
D < 19 mm 12
20 mm <D < 25 mm 7.5
25 mm <D 3
5.12.7 Vent Pipe
The pressure type hot water heater shall be provided with a vent pipe of not less than 19 mm diameter. The vent
pipe shall rise vertically above the water line of cold water tank by at least 150 mm plus 1 mm for every 30 mm
height of waterline above the bottom of the water heater.
The vent pipe shall be connected to the top of the hot water cylinder. The vent pipe may be used to supply hot
water to the point in between the cold water tank and the hot water cylinder. The vent pipe shall not be provided
with any valve or check valves.
The termination of vent pipe shall be such as not to cause any accidental discharge to hurt or scald any passerby
or person in the vicinity.
5.12.8 Capacity of Cold Water Storage Tank
The storage capacity of cold water cistern shall be at least equal to the size of hot water storage cylinder if the
cold water cistern supplies water only to the hot water heater cylinder. This capacity shall be at least twice the
capacity of hot water heater cylinder if the cold water storage tank also supplies water to the cold water draw off
taps.
5.12.9 Safety Devices
The temperature relief valve or pressure relief valve or a combination of temperature and pressure relief valves
shall be installed for the equipment for heating or storage of hot water. The temperature relief valve shall be set
at a maximum temperature of 99oC. The maximum pressure rating of water heater shall not be more than 1000
kPa. The temperature relief valve shall be placed directly above the cylinder it serves but in no case more than 75
mm away from the cylinder. The location of pressure relief valve shall be close to the equipment it serves. There
shall be no valve connection in between a relief valve and the hot water cylinder it serves.
Vol. 3 296
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.12.10 Wastes from Relief Valve
The outlet of pressure, temperature or such other valve shall not be directly connected to the drainage system.
5.12.11 Drain Cock
Adequate size of drain cock shall be provided with all storage tanks for their proper cleaning.
5.13 MATERIALS, FITTINGS & APPLIANCES
a) The materials and fittings for water supply and distribution pipe and for storage tank shall comply with the
standards listed in Part 5 'Building Materials' and shall be in accordance with Section‐ 2.15 and those specified
in this section.
b) The materials chosen shall be resistant to corrosion, both inside and outside or shall be suitably protected
against corrosion and free from all toxic and harmful substances. Polyethylene and un‐plasticized PVC pipes
shall not be installed near hot water pipes or near any other heat source..
c) All jointing of pipes and fittings shall be done in accordance with acceptable standard practices.
5.13.1 Water Supply Service and Distribution Pipes
Water supply service and distribution pipes shall conform to the standards listed in Tables 8.5.9 and 8.5.10. The
water supply pipes and tubing used outside the building or underground shall have a minimum working pressure
of 1.1 MPa at 23oC. In case of water supply exceeding 1.1 MPa pressure, the piping material shall have at least a
rated working pressure equal to the highest available pressure. The hot water distribution piping shall have a
minimum pressure of 550 kPa at 80oC. Different types/classes of uPVC (Un‐plasticized PVC pipes) are used both for
service and internal distribution pipes as described in Table 8.5.11. However, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipes shall
not be used exposed and unprotected as riser or water distribution pipe. Polythene or un‐plasticized PVC pipes
shall not be installed near the heaters or hot water piping. Lead pipes may be used only for flushing and overflow
purposes in a water supply system.
5.13.2 Pipe Fittings
The pipe fittings shall be in accordance with the standards listed in Table 8.5.12 and those specified in Part 5.
5.13.3 Concrete, Prestressed or Ferrocement Structures
The properties of the materials used for storage tank or such other structures shall conform to the material
standards specified in Part 5 of the Code.
Table‐ 8.5.9: Water Supply Service Pipe
Materials Standards
Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) plastic pipe ASTM D1527, ASTM D2282
Brass pipe ASTM B43
Cast iron water pipe ASTM D377
Copper or Copper‐alloy pipe ASTM B42, ASTM B302
Copper or Copper‐alloy tubing ASTM B75, ASTM B88, ASTM B251, ASTM B447
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe ASTM D2846, ASTM F441, ASTM F442
Galvanized steel pipe ASTM A53
Polybutyline (PB) plastic pipe and tubing ASTM D2662, ASTM D2666, ASTM D3309
Polyethyline (PE) plastic pipe and tubing ASTM D2239, ASTM D2737
PVC plastic pipe ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2672

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

Table‐ 8.5.10: Water Distribution Pipe
Material Standard
Brass pipe ASTM B43
Copper or Copper‐alloy pipe ASTM B42, ASTM B302
Copper or Copper‐alloy tubing ASTM B75, ASTM B88, ASTM B251, ASTM B477
CPVC plastic pipe and tubing ASTM D2846, ASTM F441, ASTM F442
Galvanized steel pipe ASTM A53
PVC plastic pipe ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2672
5.14 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR PIPE WORK
5.14.1 Public Water Mains
The following principles shall apply for the mains:
a) Service mains shall be of adequate size to give the required rate of flow.
Table‐ 8.5.11(a): Working Pressure Range of Different Types of uPVC (Un‐plasticized PVC) Pipes
Material Type/Class (Bar) (kg/cm2)
uPVC Pipe Class – B 6.0 6.12
uPVC Pipe Class – C 9.0 9.19
uPVC Pipe Class – D 12.0 12.25
uPVC Pipe Class – E 15.0 15.30
Table‐ 8.5.11 (b): Average Wall Thickness Class‐ E uPVC (Un‐plasticized PVC) Pipes
Average Wall Thickness of Class‐ E Type uPVC Pipe
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) Ø ½ inch (13 mm) Ø ¾ inch (19 mm) Ø 1.0 inch (25 mm) Ø
1.9 mm 2.1 mm 2.5 mm 2.7 mm
Table‐ 8.5.12: Pipe Fittings
Material Standard
Asbestos cement ISO 160, ISO 881, ISO 392
Cast iron ASME B164, ASME B16.12
Copper or copper alloy ASME B16.15, ASME B16.18, ASME B1622
ASME B16.23, ASME B16.26, ASME B16.29
ASME B16.32
Grey iron and ductile iron AWWA C110, ISO 2531
Malleable iron ASME B16.3
Plastic , uPVC ASTM D2464, ASTM D2466, ASTM D2467
ASTM D2609, ASTM F409, ASTM F437,
ASTM F438, ASTM F439
Steel ASME B16.9, ASME B16.11, ASME B16.28
Vol. 3 298
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
b) The mains shall be divided into sections by making loop system and with the provisions of sluice valves and
other valves so that any part of water main may be shut off for repairs without affecting major part of pipe
network
c) To avoid dead ends, the mains shall be arranged in a grid formation or in a network.
d) Where dead ends are unavoidable, a hydrant shall be provided to act as a wash‐out
e) The wash‐out valve shall not discharge directly into a drain or sewer, or into a manhole or chamber directly
connected to it; an effectively trapped chamber shall be interposed, into which the wash‐out shall discharge.
f) Air valves shall be provided at all summits, and wash‐out at low points between summits.
g) Mains need not be laid at unvarying gradients, but may follow the general contour of the ground. They shall,
however, fall continuously towards the wash‐out and rise towards the air valves. The gradient shall be such
that there shall always be a positive pressure at every point under working conditions.
h) The cover for the mains shall be at least 900 mm under roadways and 750 mm in the case of footpaths. This
cover shall be measured from the top of the pipe to the surface of the ground.
i) The mains shall be located sufficiently away from other service lines like electric and telegraph cables to
ensure safety and where the mains cannot be located away from such lines, suitable protective measures
shall be accorded to the mains.
5.14.2 Interconnection Pipes from Water Main
a) Every premises that is supplied with water by the Authority shall have its own separate communication pipe.
In the case of a group or block of premises belonging to the same owner the same communication pipe may
supply water to more than one premises with the prior permission of the Authority.
b) The communication pipe between the water main and the stop‐cock at the boundary of the premises shall be
laid by the Authority.
c) Connections up to 50 mm diameter may be made on the water main by means of screwed ferrules, provided
the size of the connections does not exceed one‐third the size of the water main. In all other cases, the
connection shall be made by a T‐branch off the water main.
d) As far as practicable, the communication pipe and the underground service pipe shall be laid at right angles to
the main and in approximately straight lines to facilitate location for repairs. It is also recommended that the
communication pipe be laid in a pipe in pipe sleeve of larger dia. Made of non‐corrosive material to protect
the communication pipe.
e) Every communication pipe shall have a stopcock and meter inserted in it. The waterway of each such fitting
shall not be less than the internal sectional area of the communication pipe and the fittings shall be located
within the premises at a conspicuous place accessible to the Authority which shall have exclusive control over
it.
5.14.3 User/Consumer Pipes
a) No consumer pipe shall be laid in the premises to connect the communication pipe without the approval of
the Authority.
b) The consumer pipe within the premises shall be laid underground with a suitable cover to safeguard against
damage from traffic and extremes of weather.
c) To control the branch pipe to each separately occupied part of a building supplied by a common service pipe,
a stop tap shall be fixed to minimize the interruption of the supply during repairs. All such stop valves shall be

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

fixed in accessible positions and properly protected. To supply water for drinking or for culinary purposes,
direct taps shall be provided on the branch pipes connected directly to the consumer pipe. In the case of
multi‐storied buildings, down‐take taps shall be supplied from overhead tanks.
d) Pumps shall not be allowed on the service pipe, as they cause a drop in pressure on the suction side, thereby
affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where pumping is required, a properly protected
storage tank of adequate capacity shall be provided to feed the pump.
e) No direct boosting (by booster pumps) shall be allowed from the service pipes (communication and consumer
pipes).
f) Consumer pipes shall be so designed and constructed as to avoid air‐locks. Draining taps shall be provided at
the lowest points from which the piping shall rise continuously to draw‐off taps.
g) Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to reduce the production and transmission of noise as much as
possible.
h) Consumer pipes in roof spaces and unventilated air spaces under floors or in basements shall be protected
against corrosion.
i) Consumer pipes shall be so located that they are not unduly exposed to accidental damage and shall be fixed
in such positions as to facilitate cleaning and avoid accumulations of dirt.
j) All consumer pipes shall be so laid as to permit expansion and contraction or other movements.
5.14.4 Prohibited Connections
a) A service pipe shall not be connected into any distribution pipe; such connection may permit the backflow of
water from a cistern into the service pipe, in certain circumstances, with consequent danger of contamination
and depletion of storage capacity. It might also result in pipes and fittings being subjected to a pressure
higher than that for which they are designed, and in flooding from overflowing cisterns.
b) No pipe for conveyance or in connection with water supplied by the Authority shall communicate with any
other receptacle used or capable of being used for conveyance other than water supplied by the Authority.
c) Where storage tanks are provided, no person shall connect or be permitted to connect any service pipe with
any distributing pipe.
d) No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any water‐closet or a urinal. All such supplies shall be
from flushing cisterns which shall be supplied from storage tank.
e) No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot water system or to any other apparatus used
for heating other than through a feed cistern thereof.
5.15 SAFE CONVEYANCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF WATER & PREVENTION OF BACKFLOW
5.15.1 Basic Principles
a) Wholesome water supply provided for drinking and culinary purposes shall not be liable to contamination
from any less satisfactory water. There shall, therefore, be no cross‐connection whatsoever between the
distribution system for wholesome water and any pipe or fitting containing unwholesome water, or water
liable to contamination, or of uncertain quality, or water which has been used for any other purpose. The
provision of reflux or non‐return valves or closed and sealed stop valves shall not be construed as a
permissible substitute for complete absence of cross connection.
Vol. 3 300
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
b) The design of the pipe work shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply
from any cistern or appliance, whether by siphonage or otherwise. Reflux non‐return valves shall not be
relied upon to prevent such backflow.
c) Where a supply of less satisfactory water than wholesome water becomes inevitable as an alternative or is
required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered only into a cistern and by a pipe or fitting
discharging into the air gap at a height above the top edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore and
in no case less than 150 mm. It is necessary to maintain a definite air gap in all appliances or taps used in
water closets.
d) All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed and maintained as to remain completely water‐tight, thereby
avoiding wastage, damage to property and the risk of contamination.
e) No water supply line shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into or through any sewer, scour outlet or drain or any
manhole connected therewith nor through any ash pit or manure pit or any material of such nature that is
likely to cause undue deterioration of the pipe, except where it is unavoidable.
f) Where the laying of any pipe through corrosive soil or previous material is unavoidable, the piping shall be
properly protected from contact with such soil or material by being carried through an exterior cast iron tube
or by some other suitable means as approved by the Authority. Any existing piping or fitting laid or fixed,
which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed immediately by the consumer and
relaid by him in conformity with the above requirements and to the satisfaction of the Authority.
g) Where lines have to be laid in close proximity to electric cables or in corrosive soils, adequate
precautions/protection should be taken to avoid corrosion.
h) Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by frost or traffic loads and
vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence, but where such ground cannot be avoided,
special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the piping. Where piping has to be laid across recently
disturbed ground, the ground shall be thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and even
support.
i) Undesigning and planning the layout of the pipe work, due attention shall be given to the maximum rate of
discharge required, economy in Iabour and materials, protection against damage and corrosion, water
hammer, protection from frost, if required, and to avoidance of airlocks, noise transmission and unsightly
arrangement.
j) To reduce frictional losses, piping shall be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of jointing shall be such as to
avoid internal roughness and projection at the joints, whether of the jointing materials or otherwise.
k) Change in diameter and in direction shall preferably be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of
head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made which is likely to materially diminish or alter the cross section.
l) No boiler for generating steam or closed boilers of any description or any machinery shall be supplied direct
from a service or supply pipe. Every such boiler or machinery shall be supplied from a feed cistern.
5.15.2 Backflow Prevention
a) The installation shall be such that water delivered is not liable to become contaminated or that
contamination of the public water supply does not occur.
b) The various types of piping and mechanical devices acceptable for backflow protection are:
i) Barometric loop,
ii) Air gap,
iii) Atmosphere vacuum breaker,

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

iv) Pressure vacuum breaker,
v) Double check valve, and
vi) Reduced pressure backflow device.
c) The installation shall not adversely affect drinking water:
i) by materials in contact with the water being unsuitable for the purpose;
ii) as a result of backflow of water from water fittings, or water using appliances into pipe work connected
to mains or to other fittings and appliances;
iii) by cross‐connection between pipes conveying water supplied by the water undertaker with pipes
conveying water from some other source; and
iv) by stagnation, particularly at high temperatures.
d) No pump or similar apparatus, the purpose of which is to increase the pressure in or rate of flow from a
supply pipe or any fitting or appliance connected to a supply pipe, shall be connected unless the prior written
permission of the water supplier has been obtained in each instance.
The use of such a pump or similar apparatus is likely to lead to pressure reduction in the upstream pipe work
which, if significant, increase the risk of backflow from other fittings.
e) The water shall not come in contact with unsuitable materials of construction.
f) No pipe or fitting shall be laid in, on or through land fill, refuse, an ashpit, sewer, drain, cesspool or refuse
chute, or any manhole connected with them.
g) No pipe susceptible to deterioration by contact with any substance shall be laid or installed in a place where
such deterioration is likely to occur. No pipe that is permeable to any contaminant shall be laid or installed in
any position where permeation is likely to occur.
h) If a liquid (other than water) is used in any type of heating primary circuit, which transfers heat to water for
domestic use, the liquid shall be non‐toxic and noncorrosive.
i) A backflow prevention device shall be arranged or connected at or as near as practicable to each point of
delivery and use of water. Appliances with built‐in backflow prevention shall be capable of passing the test.
All backflow prevention devices shall be installed so that they are accessible for examination, repair or
replacement. Such devices shall be capable of being tested periodically by the Authority to ensure that the
device is functioning efficiently and no backflow is occurring at any time.
5.16 LAYING OF PIPES ON SITE
5.16.1 Excavation of Trenches and Refilling
a) The bottoms of the trench excavations shall be so prepared that the barrels of the pipes, when laid, are well
bedded for their whole length on a firm surface and are true to line and gradient.
b) In the refilling of trenches, the pipes shall be surrounded with fine selected material, well rammed so as to
resist subsequent movement of the pipes.
c) No stones shall be in contact with the pipes; when resting on rock, the pipes shall be bedded on fine‐selected
material or (especially where there is a steep gradient) on a layer of concrete.
d) The width of excavation trench shall be at least 0.4 m more than the outside diameter of the pipe.
e) The depth of ground cover shall be at least 0.9 m under roadway or 0.75 m under garden from the top
surface of the pipe to the ground surface.
Vol. 3 302
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
f) The bottom of the trench shall be carefully prepared so that the pipe will be bedded well for its entire length
on firm surface.
5.16.2 Laying of Pipe
a) The pipes shall be carefully cleared of all foreign matter before being laid.
b) In sloping ground, the pipe laying shall proceed in upward direction. The pipe shall be provided with anchor
blocks to withstand hydraulic pressure.
5.16.3 Laying of Pipe Through Ducts, Chases, Notches or Holes
Provisions for laying pipes in ducts or chase shall be made during the time of construction. When these will be cut
into existing walls, they shall be large enough with smooth finishing for fixing the pipe and to accommodate
thermal expansion. Piping subject to external pressure shall not be laid in notches or holes.
5.16.4 Lagged Piping
Lagged piping shall be entirely covered with waterproof and fire insulating materials before their attachment to
the walls outside the building and shall be anchored with the wall keeping a gap in between the wall and the
piping.
5.16.5 Jointing of Pipes
All joints and connections shall be gas tight and water tight for the pressure required by the test in accordance
with Sec 5.22.2. The joints between different piping and fittings for water supply shall conform to the standards
cited against them in Table 8.5.13. The requirements for the joints not specified in the table shall be subject to the
approval of the Authority.
Table 8.5.13: Joints Between Different Piping and Fittings
Material Standard
ABS plastic pipe and fittings ASTM D2235, ASTM D2661, ASTM
D3139, ASTM F628 ASME B1.20.1
Asbestos, cement pipe and fittings ASTM D1869
Brass pipe and fittings ASME B1.20.1
Cast iron pipe and fittings ASTM C564
Copper and copper alloy pipe and fittings ASTM B32, ASME B1.20.1
PVC plastic pipe and fittings ASTM D2846, ASTM D3139, ASTM
F493, ASME B1.20.1
Galvanized steel pipe and fittings ASME B1.20.1
PB plastic pipe, tubing and fittings ASTM D2657, ASTM D3140, ASTM
D3309
PE plastic pipe, tubing and fittings ASTM D2657
PVC plastic pipe and fittings ASTM D2564, ASTM D2855, ASTM
D3139, ASTM D3212, ASTM F402,
ASTM F656, ASME B1.20.1
5.16.6 Special Care for Rat Proofing
The location and installation of water meter box shall be such as not to permit the entrance of rats into the
building. The openings through walls, floors or ceilings for the installation of piping shall be closed by using proper
collars to prevent the entrance of rats.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.17 HANGERS AND SUPPORT
The piping system shall be installed with proper hangers and support to minimize undue strains and stresses. All
fixtures and fittings shall be provided with hangers and support to secure them properly.
5.17.1 Galvanic action
Hangers, anchors and strapping materials shall be strong and ductile and shall not promote galvanic action.
5.17.2 Hanger Spacing
Vertical and horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with Table 8.5.14.
Table 8.5.14: Hanger Spacing
Piping Material Max. Horizontal Max. Vertical

Spacing (m) Spacing (m)
Galvanized steel pipe 3.5 4.5
Copper pipe or copper‐alloy tubing > 38 mm diameter 3.5 3.0
Copper pipe or copper‐alloy tubing < 38 mm diameter 2.0 3.0
PVC pipe and tubing 1.0 1.0
Aluminium tubing 3.0 4.5
Brass pipe 3.0 3.0
5.18 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SUPPLY
5.18.1 Crossconnection
Potable water supply system shall be protected against non‐potable water sources or wastes (solid, liquid or
gases). There shall be no cross‐connection between potable water distribution system and non‐potable water
distribution or waste disposal system.
5.18.2 Submerged outlet
From potable water supply system shall be avoided. Connection of potable water to boiler feed water system, or
heating or cooling system shall be made through proper air gap.
5.18.3 Cooling water
Water used for cooling or for other purposes shall not be returned to the potable water supply system.
5.18.4 Back flow
Potable water supply system shall be protected against backflow either by air gap or by back flow preventor.
Reflex non‐return valve shall not be used for this purpose. Details have been explained in section 5.15.2.
5.18.5 Back flow Protections
The connection of potable water for health care plumbing fixtures shall be protected against backflow in
accordance with Table 8.5.15.
5.18.6 Air Gap
The minimum air gaps for different water supply openings or outlet shall be at least 3 times the effective
opening when they will be placed close to a wall. The minimum air gaps shall be at least 2 times the effective
opening when they will be located away from a wall.
Vol. 3 304
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
Table 8.5.15: Water Supply Protection for Hospital Fixtures
Fixtures Protections Required
Aspirators Vacuum breaker
Bedpan washer Vacuum breaker
Boiling type sterilizer Air gap
Exhaust condenser Vacuum breaker
Flush floor drain Vacuum breaker
House connection Vacuum breaker
Pressure sterilizer Vacuum breaker
Vacuum system Air gap or vacuum breaker
(cleaning and fluid section)
5.18.7
Potable water supply connection to any cistern or apparatus containing chemical(s) shall be done only with the
special approval for such connection by the Authority and shall be marked by a tag.
5.18.8
All piping and fitting shall be designed, installed and maintained as to be and to remain completely air‐tight and
thereby avoiding waste of water, damage to property and to avoid the risk of contamination.
5.18.9
Non‐potable water supply system shall have to be painted and marked by a tag.
5.18.10
Flushing valve operated water closets when installed in any building shall be supplied through a separate branch
pipe with a back flow preventer at the starting point where the branch pipe is taken off from the supply pipe.
5.19 HEALTH CARE WATER SUPPLY
5.19.1 General Requirement
All hospitals shall have at least two service pipes from the individual water supply source or from the water main
for supplying water without any interruption. For roof storage system, the hospital shall have at least two storage
tanks such that each of them is capable of serving the water distribution system in absence of the other. All
special fixtures shall be installed without interference to the transportation and to the safety of patient and staff.
5.19.2 Hot Water Supply
All hospitals shall be equipped to supply hot water as required by different fixtures and equipment.
5.19.3 Water Supply Protection
The water supply connection to all special equipment or fixtures shall be protected against backflow, flooding,
fouling and contamination of water supply system in accordance with Section 5.9.
5.20 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING THE SYSTEM
5.20.1 General
The new and repaired potable water supply system including storage tank shall be disinfected before their use.
The existing water supply system shall be cleaned and disinfected depending upon the quality of water. The
storage tank shall be cleaned and disinfected at least once a year.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.20.2 Disinfection Procedure
The following procedure may be adopted to disinfect the plumbing system :
a) The water supply system or storage tank shall be flushed with potable water until clean water appears at the
outlets.
b) The system or part thereof which requires disinfection shall be filled up with chlorinated water containing 50
mg/l of chlorine for 24 hours or for 3 hours with a chlorinated water of chlorine concentration of 200 mg/l.
c) After the period of disinfection, the system shall be flushed with potable water until the chlorine is
completely removed from the water in the system.
d) The above procedure shall be repeated until the bacteriological examination shows presence of no water
contamination within the system.
5.21 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
5.21.1 Inspection
Piping and joints shall not be enclosed, concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by the
Authority. All piping and fixtures shall be inspected for satisfactory supports and protection from damage and
corrosion.
5.21.2 Testing
After installation of the entire water supply system or part thereof, it shall be tested and approved by the
Authority before its use.
a) Testing of Water Mains : The section of the main to be tested shall be charged with water carefully by
providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop cock to expel all air from the main. The main shall be allowed to stand full
of water for a few days. After that the mains shall be tested to a pressure of 500 kPa or double the maximum
working pressure, whichever is greater for at least 5 minutes. The system shall be able to maintain the above
test pressure.
b) Testing of Distribution Pipes and Fixtures : The distribution system to be tested shall be slowly and carefully
charged with water to expel all air from the system and to avoid all shocks and water hammer. The piping and
fittings shall be absolutely water tight when all draw off taps are closed. The system shall be able to maintain
the pressures and flow required under working conditions.
c) Testing of Hot Water System : The entire hot water system shall be tested for the maximum rated
temperature and pressure of hot water storage system. The system shall be able to maintain the required
test pressure. All safety devices shall be tested for their proper operation.
5.21.3 Completion Certificate
The licensed plumber shall issue completion certificate in a prescribed form (Appendix 8.5.B) to the Authority on
completion of the water supply system or part thereof for inspection and testing. After testing, the Authority will
allow the water connection from the water main (if any) and give the final approval (Appendix 8.5.B) to use the
system.
5.22 GUIDE TO MAINTENANCE
The owner or his/her designated agent shall maintain the water supply system in a safe operating condition as
specified by the Code.
Vol. 3 306
CE - Water Supply
432 Chapter 5
Appendix
5.22.1 Frequency of Cleaning
The storage tank shall be inspected regularly and shall be cleaned and disinfected periodically. Metal tanks
showing the sign of corrosion shall be coated as specified in Section 5.9.2.2.
5.22.2 Over flow Pipe
The overflow pipes of storage tank shall be inspected regularly to keep the flow free from obstruction.
5.22.3 Water Quality
A periodical examination of water quality may be made.
5.23 INDIVIDUAL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
5.23.1 General
In the absence of a public water supply, the individual potable water source shall be used to supply water in a
distribution system. The following water sources may be used for individual water supply purposes : drilled well,
dug well, driven well, spring, infiltration gallery.
5.23.2 Water Requirements
The capacity of source shall be sufficient to supply water as specified in Section 5.5.
5.23.3 Quality of Water
Water from developed well or cistern shall meet the potable water quality standard requirements specified by
the Department of Environment, Bangladesh.
5.23.4 Chlorination
The well or cistern shall be chlorinated after their construction or repair.
5.23.5 Location of Water Source
The minimum distance of water source and pump suction line from potential sources of contamination shall be in
accordance with Table 8.5.16.
Table 8.5.16: Distance from Potential Sources of Contamination
Potential Source of Contamination Distance (m)
Pump floor drain of cast iron, draining to ground surface 1
Sewer 3
Farm silo 8
Septic tank 8
Subsurface pit/Seepage pit 15
Subsurface disposal field 15
Barnyard 30
Pasture 30
5.23.6 Well Construction
5.23.6.1 Location of Water Table
The individual water supply shall not be developed from a water bearing stratum with water table at a depth less
than 3 m below the ground surface.

Part 8
CE - 432
Building Services
Appendix

5.23.6.2 Outside Casing
The outside watertight casing shall have to be installed for each well up to a depth of at least 3 m below the
ground surface and shall project at least 150 mm above the ground surface. The lower end of the casing shall be
sealed in an impermeable stratum or extend into the water bearing stratum. The size of the casing shall be large
enough to permit the installation of an independent drop pipe. The casing may be of concrete, tile, or galvanized
or corrugated metal pipe. The annular space between the casing and the earth shall be filled with grout to a
minimum depth of 3 m. For flood prone regions, top of the casing or pipe sleeve shall be at least 300 mm above
the flood level.
5.23.6.3 Well Cover
All potable wells shall be equipped with a watertight cover overlapping the top of the casing or pipe sleeve. For dug or bored well,
the overlap and downward extension of the cover shall be at least 50 mm outside the well casing or well. The annular space between
the casing or pipe sleeve and the drop pipe shall have a watertight sealing.
5.23.6.4 Drainage from Well Platform or Pump House
The construction of well platform or pump house shall be such that this will drain away from the well by gravity.
5.23.7 Pumping Equipment
The design, installation and construction of pumps shall be such that they will not permit the entrance of any contaminating material
into the well or water supply system. The pump shall be accessible for inspection, maintenance and repair.

Relevant Appendices:

Appendix – 8.5.A Application for Permit to Construct Water Supply and Distribution System
Appendix – 8.5.B Completion Certificate (Water Supply Works)
Appendix – 8.5.C Sizing of Cold Water Supply and Distribution Piping
Appendix – 8.5.D Recommended Water Quality for Domestic Purposes.

Vol. 3 308

Design of An Industrial Village

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design of An Industrial Village

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DESIGN OF WATER SUPPLY,

SANITATION AND SEWERAGE

Project Planners and Designers

Course No.: CE - 432

Design of Water Supply, Sanitation and

Report on Field Tour in CETP 149

Chapter 8: Design of Sewer System

Chapter 8: Design of Sewer System

* In the week 9, 10 & 11 work was paused due to Civil summit.

population and production capacity of the industry. Bangladesh National

distribution pipes, overhead and underground water tanks, plumbing fixtures

Administrative Wing: It is comprised of two departments; Executive

Commercial Wing: Commercial wing ids responsible for financial activities of

Human Resource Management Wing: It is responsible for ensuring that

Management and social Welfare Wing: Environmental, social aspects the

MD’s Secretariat Directors, Consultants

Personal Secretary Personal Manager General Manager Fiscal Reviser (2)

GM’s Secretary Industrial Wing Commercial Wing HR Management Administrative Management

Production Engineering Quality Control

Spinning Sample Manufa Washing Knitting Utility Vehicle Machine Quality

APM (1) Supervisor

(25) (25) (25) (25) (25)

Head of Head of Research Head of R&D

Executive (5) Buying (1) Selling (1) Executive Executive Executive

Merchandise Executive (5)

 The layout follows grid pattern, which is advantageous while

Figure 2.1: Layout of Rongin Industrial Village

Playground Sample &

Canteen Garden Administrative Chairman's

I. Population calculation should be made for each zones, i.e. Residential,

II. For the residential zone proper considerations should be made in

III. The assumptions (% of worker/staff staying inside or outside the village)

IV. Future population calculation should be made with a set of assumptions on

V. For the administrative, industrial, and common service zones proper

There are mainly four classes of residents.

1) Growth predicted after 10 years = 20%

1) Growth predicted after 10 years = 20%

1) Growth predicted after 10 years = 10%

1st class officers:

Total employee number = 14

Accommodation given 100%

Assumed family member = 7

Total present population = 14*7 = 98

Annual growth rate = 0.70%

Population after 10 years = 98*(1+0.007)*10 = 105

Population after 20 years = 98*(1+0.007)*20 = 113

Table 3.1: Population Estimation for Administrative Zone

Summary of Estimation for Administrative Zone

Table 3.2: Population Estimation for Industrial Zone

Summary of Estimation for Industrial Zone

Table 3.3: Population Estimation for Common Services

Summary of Population Estimation for Common Services

Table 3.4: Population Estimation for Residential Zone

Table 3.4: Population Estimation for Residential Zone (Contd.)

4th class dorm 1st class quarter 2nd class quarter

2nd class dorm

3rd class quarter

4th class quarter

3rd class dorm

Figure 3.1: Population percentages in

Residential water demand

Industrial Water Demand

Water for Personal Consumption

Population after 10 years = 98(1+0.007)10 = 105

Population after 20 years = 98(1+0.007)20 = 113